|
hsb2 PLUS Series
LCD Display
Owner’s
Handbook
Document number: 81186_3
Date: September 2002
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
iii
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display Owner’s
Handbook
September 2002
INTENDED USE
The display units detailed in this handbook may form part of navigational
radar systems intended for light marine use. These displays and radar
systems are only an aid to navigation.
SAFETY NOTICES
This radar equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with the
instructions contained in this manual. Failure to do so can result in personal
injury and/or navigational inaccuracies. In particular:
1. HIGH VOLTAGE. The LCD display unit and scanner unit contain
high voltages. Adjustments require specialized service procedures and
tools only available to qualified service technicians – there are no user
serviceable parts or adjustments. The operator should never remove the
display unit cover or attempt to service the equipment.
2. ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY. The radar scanner transmits
electromagnetic energy. It is important that the radar is turned off whenever
personnel are required to come close to the scanner to perform work on the
scanner assembly or associated equipment.
It is recommended that the radar scanner is mounted out of range of personnel
(above head height).
Avoidlookingdirectlyattheantennaasyoureyesarethemostsensitivepartof
the body to electromagnetic energy.
When properly installed and operated, the use of this radar will conform to the
requirements of ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992 Standard for Safety Levels with
RespecttoHumanExposuretoRadioFrequencyElectromagneticFields,3Hz
to 300 GHz and NRPB, Board Statement on Restrictions on Human Exposure
toStaticandTimeVaryingElectromagneticFieldsandRadiation. DocNRPB,
N0. 5 (1993).
4.NAVIGATIONAID. Thisunitisonlyanaidtonavigation. Itsaccuracycan
be affected by many factors, including equipment failure or defects,
environmental conditions, and improper handling or use. It is the user’s
responsibility to exercise common prudence and navigational judgements.
This radar unit should not be relied upon as a substitute for such prudence and
judgement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Raymarine products are supported by a network of Authorized Service
Representatives. For information on our products and services, contact either
of the following:
UNITED STATES Raymarine Inc.
22 Cotton Road, Unit D
Nashua, NH 03063-4219
Telephone: +1 603 881 5200
+1 800 539 5539
Fax:
+1 603 864 4756
EUROPE
Raymarine Limited
Anchorage Park
Portsmouth
Hampshire PO3 5TD
England
Telephone: +44 (0) 23 9269 3611
Fax:
+44 (0) 23 9269 4642
Copyright © Raymarine Ltd. 2002
The technical and graphical information contained in this handbook, to the
best of our knowledge, was correct as it went to press. However, our policy of
continuous improvement and updating may change product specifications
withoutprior notice. As a result, unavoidable differences between the product
and handbook may occur from time to time, for which liability cannot be
accepted by Raymarine.
Raymarine is a registered trademark of Raymarine Limited.
SeaTalk is a registered trademark of Raymarine Limited.
hsb2 is a trademark of Raymarine Limited.
Pathfinder Plus is a trademark of Raymarine Limited.
ThisproductcontainstechnologyprovidedunderlicensebyAcornGroupplc.
The copyright of this intellectual property is acknowledged by Raymarine
Ltd., as are Acorn’s trademarks and patents. Acorn’s world wide web address
is http://www.acorn.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
v
Preface
This handbook describes the radar and chart aspects of the following hsb2
(PLUS) series display systems from Raymarine:
System
Display
Scanner Chartplotter
Pathfinder Radar
Raychart Chartplotter
RL70 PLUS
RC520PLUS
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Combined Pathfinder Radar/Chartplotter RL70RC PLUS
This handbook also describes the use of multi-display systems.
Note: Radar systems are supplied with an appropriate Raymarine scanner
unit and inter-connecting cable. Details for installing the scanner are de-
scribed in the Pathfinder Radar Scanner Owner’s Handbook.
The Raychart (RC) display units include a cartridge holder assembly which
contains two slots for C-MAP NT chart cards.
This handbook contains very important information on the installation and
operation of your new equipment. In order to obtain the best results in
operation and performance, please read this handbook thoroughly.
Raymarine’s Technical Services representatives or your local dealer will be
available to answer any questions you may have.
Warranty
To register your display unit ownership, please take a few minutes to fill out
the warranty registration card found at the end of this handbook. It is very
important that you complete the owner information and return the card to the
factory in order to receive full warranty benefits.
EMC Conformance
All Raymarine equipment and accessories are designed to the best industry
standards for use in the recreational marine environment.
The design and manufacture of Raymarine equipment and accessories
conform to the appropriate Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards,
but correct installation is required to ensure that performance is not
compromised.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Contents
Preface ............................................................................................... v
Warranty ...........................................................................................v
EMC Conformance ...........................................................................v
Chapter 1: Overview ..........................................................................................1.1
How to Use This Handbook .......................................................... 1.1
1.1 General .......................................................................................... 1.4
Introduction to hsb2 Systems ........................................................ 1.4
PLUS Display Units ..................................................................... 1.5
Operating Modes .......................................................................... 1.6
Heading and Position Data ........................................................... 1.9
1.2 The Pathfinder Radar PLUS Display .......................................... 1.10
Pathfinder Radar PLUS Display Options ................................... 1.10
Radar Functions ......................................................................... 1.12
1.3 The Chartplotter Display ............................................................ 1.13
Chartplotter Display Options ...................................................... 1.14
Chartplotter Functions ................................................................ 1.15
1.4 Operating Controls ..................................................................... 1.16
Trackpad and Cursor ................................................................... 1.16
Dedicated Keys ........................................................................... 1.18
Soft Keys ..................................................................................... 1.19
Pop-Up Menus ............................................................................ 1.19
Database Lists ............................................................................. 1.20
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display ....................................2.1
2.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2.1
Conventions Used ......................................................................... 2.1
Simulator ...................................................................................... 2.1
2.2 Switching the Display On and Off ................................................ 2.2
Simulator Mode ............................................................................ 2.5
Changing the Lighting & Contrast ................................................ 2.6
2.3 Controlling the Display ................................................................. 2.7
Selecting the Mode of Operation .................................................. 2.7
Customizing the Screen Presentation Options ............................ 2.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
vii
2.4 Radar Display Control Functions ............................................... 2.16
Using the Zoom Function ........................................................... 2.16
Offsetting the Center ................................................................... 2.17
Hiding the Ship’s Heading Marker (SHM) ................................. 2.18
2.5 Chart Display Control Functions ................................................ 2.19
Moving Around the Chart ........................................................... 2.19
2.6 Typical Chart Scenarios .............................................................. 2.23
Place and Goto a Waypoint ......................................................... 2.24
Make and Follow a Route ........................................................... 2.26
Review Your Passage Plan .......................................................... 2.28
Review Your Passage Plan .......................................................... 2.29
Displaying the Radar and Synchronizing Radar & Chart ........... 2.30
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations ..........................................................3.1
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 3.1
3.2 Range Control ............................................................................... 3.2
Changing the Range ...................................................................... 3.3
Determining Actual Radar Range ................................................. 3.3
3.3 Interpreting and Adjusting the Radar Picture ............................... 3.4
Identifying False Echo Returns .................................................... 3.5
Adjusting Gain, Sea Clutter, Rain Clutter and Tune ..................... 3.7
Changing the Targets Display ......................................................3.11
3.4 Measuring Range and Bearing Using VRM/EBLs .................... 3.13
Measuring Range and Bearing to Target from Vessel ................. 3.14
Measuring Range and Bearing Between Targets (FLOAT) ........ 3.16
Controlling VRM/EBL Data Boxes ........................................... 3.18
3.5 Setting Guard Zones and Alarms ................................................ 3.19
Placing a Guard Zone .................................................................. 3.20
Moving, Reshaping or Deleting a Guard Zone ........................... 3.21
Controlling Guard Zone Alarms ................................................. 3.21
3.6 MARPA ...................................................................................... 3.23
Introduction to MARPA ............................................................. 3.23
Using MARPA ............................................................................ 3.25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
viii
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Chapter 4: Integrated Radar Operations ........................................................4.1
4.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 4.1
4.2 Changing the Heading Mode ........................................................ 4.2
True and Relative Motion ............................................................. 4.2
4.3 Using Marks .................................................................................. 4.4
4.4 Man Overboard (MOB) ................................................................ 4.5
4.5 Cursor Echo .................................................................................. 4.6
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations ...........................................................5.1
5.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 5.1
5.2 Using Chart Cards ......................................................................... 5.2
Inserting a Chart Card ................................................................... 5.2
Removing a Chart Card ................................................................ 5.3
Displaying the Chart Data ............................................................. 5.3
Displaying Chart Object and Source Information ........................ 5.4
5.3 Working with Waypoints .............................................................. 5.8
Introduction .................................................................................. 5.8
Placing a Waypoint ....................................................................... 5.9
Selecting a Waypoint .................................................................. 5.12
Waypoint Data Display ............................................................... 5.12
Editing the Waypoint Details ...................................................... 5.13
Erasing a Waypoint ..................................................................... 5.14
Moving a Waypoint .................................................................... 5.14
Using the ST60 or ST80 Navigator Keypad ............................... 5.15
5.4 Working with Routes .................................................................. 5.18
Creating a New Route ................................................................. 5.19
Saving the Current Route ............................................................ 5.22
Clearing the Current Route ......................................................... 5.23
Retrieve a Route From the Database ........................................... 5.23
Displaying Route Information .................................................... 5.24
Using the Route List to Erase and Name a Route ....................... 5.26
Editing a Route ........................................................................... 5.27
5.5 Following Routes and Going to Points ....................................... 5.29
Follow a Route ............................................................................ 5.29
Target Point Arrival .................................................................... 5.31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
ix
Other Follow Route Options ....................................................... 5.31
Going To an Individual Target Point ........................................... 5.32
Stop Follow or Stop Goto ............................................................ 5.33
5.6 Transferring Waypoints and Routes ........................................... 5.34
5.7 Using Tracks ............................................................................... 5.38
Setting Up a Track ...................................................................... 5.39
Clearing the Current Track ......................................................... 5.40
Managing Tracks ........................................................................ 5.40
SmartRoute ................................................................................. 5.42
Chapter 6: Further Chart Operations ..............................................................6.1
6.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 6.1
6.2 Measuring Distances Using the VRM/EBL Key .......................... 6.2
6.3 Alarms and Timers ........................................................................ 6.4
Alarm Reporting ........................................................................... 6.4
Setting Alarms and Timers ........................................................... 6.5
6.4 Man Overboard (MOB) ................................................................ 6.6
6.5 Cursor Echo .................................................................................. 6.7
6.6 GPS Setup ..................................................................................... 6.8
6.7 Data Log Mode ........................................................................... 6.10
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults ...................................................7.1
7.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 7.1
7.2 Changing the Set Up Parameters .................................................. 7.2
7.3 System Set Up Parameters ............................................................ 7.4
Data Boxes .................................................................................... 7.6
Bearing Mode ............................................................................... 7.6
Cursor Reference .......................................................................... 7.6
Cursor Readout ............................................................................. 7.6
Day/Night ..................................................................................... 7.7
Help ............................................................................................... 7.7
Soft Keys ....................................................................................... 7.7
Key Beep ...................................................................................... 7.7
MOB Data ..................................................................................... 7.7
Autopilot Pop Up .......................................................................... 7.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Menu Timeout Period ................................................................... 7.7
Units .............................................................................................. 7.8
Variation Source ........................................................................... 7.8
Bridge NMEA Heading ................................................................ 7.9
NMEA Out Set Up ........................................................................ 7.9
Cursor Echo .................................................................................. 7.9
Date and Time Settings ............................................................... 7.10
GPS SOG/COG Filter ................................................................. 7.10
Compass Set Up .......................................................................... 7.10
Language .................................................................................... 7.10
Simulator .....................................................................................7.11
7.4 Radar Set Up Parameters ............................................................ 7.12
EBL Display ............................................................................... 7.12
Timed Transmission Option ....................................................... 7.13
Marks Options ............................................................................ 7.13
Custom Scale .............................................................................. 7.13
Bearing Alignment ..................................................................... 7.14
Antenna Size ............................................................................... 7.14
Send on HSB ............................................................................... 7.14
7.5 MARPA Set Up Parameters ........................................................ 7.15
7.6 Advanced Settings ...................................................................... 7.16
Display Timing ........................................................................... 7.16
STC Preset .................................................................................. 7.17
Tune Preset .................................................................................. 7.17
7.7 Chart Set Up Parameters ............................................................. 7.18
Customize Chart ......................................................................... 7.18
Plotter Mode ............................................................................... 7.19
Chart Orientation ........................................................................ 7.19
Object Information ..................................................................... 7.20
Waypoint Options ....................................................................... 7.20
Vectors ........................................................................................ 7.20
Radar/Chart Synch ...................................................................... 7.20
Datum Selection ......................................................................... 7.20
Position Offset ............................................................................ 7.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
xi
Chapter 8: Installation ......................................................................................8.1
8.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 8.1
Planning the Installation ............................................................... 8.2
EMC Installation Guidelines ........................................................ 8.2
8.2 Unpacking and Inspecting the Components ................................. 8.4
8.3 Selecting the Display Unit Location ............................................. 8.5
8.4 Cable Runs .................................................................................... 8.7
Power Cable .................................................................................. 8.7
Inter-Unit Scanner Cable .............................................................. 8.8
hsb2 Cable ..................................................................................... 8.8
8.5 Mounting the Display Unit ........................................................... 8.9
8.6 System Connections ....................................................................8.11
Display Unit Connection ............................................................ 8.12
8.7 Radar System Tests and Installation Alignment ......................... 8.15
System Check ............................................................................. 8.15
Switch On and Initial Setup ........................................................ 8.15
Radar System Checks and Adjustments ..................................... 8.16
EMC Conformance ..................................................................... 8.20
8.8 Integrated Systems ...................................................................... 8.20
hsb2™ (High Speed Bus) Multiple Display Systems .................. 8.20
SeaTalk® and NMEA In ............................................................. 8.23
Using the SeaTalk Auxiliary Junction Box ................................. 8.28
Data Output ................................................................................. 8.29
Data Conversion ......................................................................... 8.30
8.9 Integrated System Checks .......................................................... 8.31
Chart Display - RL70 PLUS, RL70RC PLUS, RC520 PLUS .... 8.31
Received Data ............................................................................. 8.31
Transmitted Data ........................................................................ 8.31
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving ..............................................9.1
9.1 Maintenance ................................................................................. 9.1
Routine Checks ............................................................................. 9.1
EMC Servicing and Safety Guidelines ......................................... 9.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xii
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
9.2 Resetting the System ..................................................................... 9.2
9.3 Problem Solving ........................................................................... 9.3
Technical Support: ........................................................................ 9.3
How to Contact Raymarine (US) .................................................. 9.4
How to Contact Raymarine (Europe) ........................................... 9.5
Worldwide Support ....................................................................... 9.5
Appendix A: Specification ...................................................................................A.1
hsb2 Series7" LCD Displays .........................................................A.1
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box ................................................. B.1
Raystar 112, 105, Apelco 182 and 182XT ....................................B.2
Autohelm GPS, Z260 and Z273 ...................................................B.3
Raystar 112LP (SeaTalk version) .................................................B.4
Raystar 114 Combined GPS and Differential Beacon Receiver ...B.5
Raystar 120 WAAS Satellite Differential Receiver ......................B.6
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features .......................................................... C.1
Appendix D: SeaTalk and NMEA Data Received and Transmitted ................D.1
Appendix E: Connecting a Raymarine Heading Sensor ...................................E.1
G-Series Course Computer ...........................................................E.1
Appendix F: Abbreviations ..................................................................................F.1
Index................................................................................................. xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-1
Chapter 1: Overview
How to Use This Handbook
This handbook describes the following hsb2 (PLUS) series displays and multi-
display systems:
RL70 PLUS Pathfinder Radar, 7" LCD Display
RL70RC PLUS Pathfinder Radar & Chartplotter, 7" LCD Display
RC520 PLUS Chartplotter, 7" LCD Display
If you are installing the display system yourself, you should read Chapter 8
before you start the installation. This chapter also provides information that
will be useful if you are connecting your hsb2 series system to other
equipment.
Foran overview of hsb2 (PLUS) display systems, thedisplay unitcontrols and
the radar/chartplotter system, read Chapter 1. Chapter 2 will help you start
using your system.
Radar Operations and Chapter 4:Integrated Radar Operations.
For chartplotter operating details, refer to Chapter 5 and Chapter 6.
To change the system set up defaults, read Chapter 7.
Details for installing a radar scanner are provided in the Pathfinder Radar
Scanner Owner’s Handbook supplied with your scanner.
Note: Many illustrations in this handbook show example screens. The screen
tions, so it may differ from the illustration.
This handbook is organized as follows:
Chapter 1 provides an overview of an hsb2 multi-display system and the
featuresandfunctionsofthehsb2 PLUSseriesLCD Display. Thischapteralso
provides an overview of the controls. You should read this chapter to
familiarize yourself with the system.
Chapter 2 explains how to start using the display and describes how to use
some of the basic radar and chart functions. Chapter 2 also provides operating
guidelines fortypicalchartplotter scenarios; these guidelines introduce you to
many of the chartplotter functions.
Chapter 3 provides detailed operating information for the main radar
functions - adjusting the radar picture; measuring distances and bearings;
setting guard zones and alarms; using MARPA for target tracking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Chapter 4providesdetailedoperatinginformationforintegratedradarsystem
functions, including using marks, man overboard and cursor echo.
Chapter 5 provides detailed operating information for the standard
chartplotter functions - using chart cards, plotting waypoints and routes,
following routes and showing tracks.
Chapter 6 providesdetailedoperatinginformationforfurtherchartfunctions,
including measuring distances, man overboard and cursor echo. It includes
instructions for setting up a differential GPS.
Chapter 7 provides instructions for setting up your system to suit your
preferences. You should read this chapter to determine how to set up the radar
and chartplotter system defaults.
Chapter 8 provides planning considerations and detailed instructions for
installing the display unit(s). It should be referred to when you are ready to
install the system. Details to connect the display to other equipment are also
provided. To install a complete radar system, you will also need to read the
Owner’s Handbook supplied with the scanner.
Chapter 9 provides information on user maintenance, and what to do if you
experience problems.
The Appendices provide additional information that you may find useful:
Appendix B provides details on connecting the display unit to specific GPS
Appendix C defines the chart features shown on the chart display.
integrated systems.
Appendix E provides details on connecting a Raymarine heading sensor for
MARPA.
Appendix F provides a list of abbreviations.
An Index and warranty information are included at the end of the handbook.
A summary of the radar and chartplotter controls are provided on the Quick
Reference Cards supplied with your system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-3
Terminology
The following terminology is used to describe radar and chartplotter systems:
Master
A unit capable of sourcing specific data such as
fishfinder, chart or radar data.
Repeater
A unit capable of displaying data, such as radar, from
hsb2.
Fishfinder Display Unit providingFishfinder Master, Chart Repeater and
Radar Repeater functionality.
Radar Display
Chart Display
Unit providingRadar Master, Fishfinder Repeater
and Chart Repeater functionality.
Unit providing Chart Master, Fishfinder Repeater and
Radar Repeater functionality.
Combined DisplayUnit providing both Radar and Chart Master or Fishfinder
and Chart Master functionality.
Integrated System Additional instruments are connected via the hsb2,
Seatalk or NMEA interfaces.
hsb2™
High Speed Bus - links compatible display units.
It supersedes HSB and allows multiple display systems.
For full display and control between hsb2 series display
units, the units must be connected via hsb2 and SeaTalk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
1.1 General
The hsb2 (PLUS) series Pathfinder Radar or Pathfinder Radar/Chartplotter
comprises the 7" LCD display unit, scanner unit and associated cables. The
RC520 PLUS Chartplotter cannot be connected to the scanner unit.
Display Unit
The hsb2 (PLUS) series display unit is waterproof to CFR46 and can be
installed either above or below deck.
The unit includes:
• 7" LCD PLUS display
• Trackpad
• Eleven dedicated (labeled) control keys
• Four soft keys (unlabeled) whose functionality changes
• The Pathfinder Chartplotterer and combined Pathfinder Radar/Chartplot-
®
ter include two slots for the C-MAP NT chart cards
The display and keys can be illuminated for night-time use.
Scanner
The hsb2 series Pathfinder Radar is supplied with a scanner unit which
illuminatestargets with microwave energy and then collects the returns from
those targets. The scanner includes a sensitive low-noise front end receiver,
and a variety of clutter attenuation controls to maintain target resolution.
The scanner is adjusted and operated fromthe display unit, so these details are
provided in this Handbook. It can be switched between transmit and stand-by
modes. Italsohasa power-saving timed transmitmode which pausesbetween
bursts of transmissions.
Installation of the scanner is described separately in the Scanner Owner’s
Handbook.
Introduction to hsb2 Systems
It is possible to connect up to ten hsb2 (PLUS) series LCD or CRT displays
(dependent on cable lengths) and a scanner unit to provide an integrated
system. The system may include existing HSB display units that have been
suitably upgraded - contact your authorized Raymarine dealer for upgrade kit
details.
The hsb2 (High Speed Bus) connection enables transfer of data between
compatible units. For example, radar data is transferred from the radar (the
masterdisplay)viathehsb2 connectionandcanbedisplayedandcontrolledon
any other hsb2 series LCD or CRT display (the repeater display).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-5
In particular, you can connect your Radar to a remote Chartplotter (or
Fishfinder/Chartplotter) to provide similar functionality to the combined
Radar/Chartplotter (or Fishfinder/Chartplotter). However, you should be
aware that if you change, say, radar range on one display, it affects all displays
showing radar (or radar/chart overlay on color displays).
The hsb2 system can include several chartplotter displays, each with two chart
cartridge slots. Each display can access two local and up to six remote chart
cartridges. Chartscanbecontrolledindependentlyoneachdisplay, evenwhen
a remote chart cartridge is being used.
Pathfinder Scanner
hsb2 Radar/Chart Display
hsb2 Fishfinder Display
hsb2 Radar Display
GAIN
DISPLAY
SEA
MOB
MARKS
MULTI
VRM/EBL
ALARMS
RANGE
POWER
ENTER
CLEAR
MENU
Fishfinder, Chart, Radar transferred to all displays
D5569-1
Figure 1-1: hsb2 Integrated System
PLUS Display Units
Features
• Chartplotter – Displays chart information from the C-MAP NT® chart
cards (C-Cards)
• Uses position data from GPS, DGPS, WAAS or Loran-C technology
• Displays and transfers hsb2, SeaTalk and NMEA data
• Provides full control of data from other hsb2 instruments
• Several full-screen operating modes including: Radar, Chart, Data Log or
Sonar, if appropriate data is available.
• View radar and chart simultaneously in half-screen windows.
• Half-screen windows to display additional data: Course Deviation Indica-
tor (CDI), Bearing and Distance Indicator (BDI), navigation data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
• Cursor echo across SeaTalk, and between chart and radar windows
• Choice of orientation: Head Up, Course Up and North Up
• The system can be connected to an ST80 Navigator keypad for entry of
alpha-numeric data.
Set Up Options
Set up options allow you to choose what is displayed, how it is displayed
(including language and units), bearing mode and how the display operates
with other hsb2 units. You can view the cursor position and a variety of data
from other equipment, e.g. speed, heading, depth, wind and tide information
in a set of user-selectable data boxes. For systems with an autopilot, when the
status and locked heading information change the new data can be displayed.
Display options are provided in System Set Up, described in Chapter 7.
Screen Presentation Options, described in Chapter 2 allow you to switch the
cursor and data boxes On/Off. The cursor box and user-selected data boxes
can be moved around the screen.
Operating Modes
On a single hsb2 unit you can view a full screen radar.You can also set
Windows On to split the display into two half-screen windows to show
supplementary data or, on a combined display unit, display radar and chart
simultaneously. The main operating mode (radar or chart) is displayed in the
upper window; you choose what is displayed in the lower window.
The following are available:
Table 1-1:
hsb2 Single Display Operating Modes and Window Options
Display
Full-screen mode
Radar
Half-screen Window Options
CDI, BDI or Nav Data
RL70 PLUS
RC520 PLUS
Chart
CDI, BDI or Nav Data
Data Log
Windows not available
Radar Mode
Chart Mode
Data Log Mode
CDI, BDI, Chart or Nav Data
CDI, BDI, Radar or Nav Data
Windows not available
RL70RC PLUS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-7
Radar Display
RR
Chartplotter Display
Operating Mode for
3nm
HEAD UP
1/2
IR
Stand Alone Units
CURSOR
BRG 000°
RNG 0.220nm
MARPA
HDG MODE
TARGETS
SCREEN
RR
1/2
Additional Modes for
Linked Units
3nm
HEAD UP
IR
(or combined
Radar/Chartplotter)
HSB
SeaTalk
DISPLAY
CURSOR
BRG 000°
RNG 0.220nm
HDG MODE
TARGETS
SCREEN
MARPA
TIME
POSITION
CMG
DMG
TIME
POSITION
CMG
DMG
6.86KM
6.86KM
15:30
346°H
15:30
346°H
50°21^890N
50°21^890N
001°20^610W
50°18^010N
001°20^070W
50°21^850N
001°19^290W
50°18^500N
001°21^300W
50°20^990N
001°18^280W
50°19^660N
001°21^960W
50°19^730N
001°18^030W
50°20^930N
001°21^750W
50°18^550N
001°18^650W
001°20^610W
50°18^010N
001°20^070W
50°21^850N
001°19^290W
50°18^500N
001°21^300W
50°20^990N
001°18^280W
50°19^660N
001°21^960W
50°19^730N
001°18^030W
50°20^930N
001°21^750W
50°18^550N
001°18^650W
7.23KM
7.23KM
6.67KM
5.74KM
5.00KM
4.63KM
5.00KM
5.74KM
7.23KM
7.23KM
6.67KM
5.74KM
5.00KM
4.63KM
5.00KM
5.74KM
16:00
16:30
17:00
17:30
18:00
18:30
19:00
19:30
180°H
012°H
206°H
043°H
245°H
093°H
302°H
145°H
16:00
16:30
17:00
17:30
18:00
18:30
19:00
19:30
180°H
012°H
206°H
043°H
245°H
093°H
302°H
145°H
DISPLAY
STOP LOG
STOP LOG
CLEAR LOG
CLEAR LOG
D4285-1
Figure 1-2: Full Screen Operating Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Half-Screen Window Options
• Chart display, Radar display: If data is available as a function of the
combined display unit it can be displayed full screen, as shown in
Figure 1-2, or in a half-screen window.
• CDI: This gives the Course Deviation Indicator graphical display, with
data relating to the target waypoint.
data relating to the target waypoint.
• Nav Data: This shows ninedata boxes, providing navigational data in the
units specified in your set up. Note that up to 6 of these data boxes are also
available as a user-selectable group (see Section 7.3).
You select the operating mode and windows using the DISPLAY key as
described in Chapter 2.
Multi-display systems
If you have several hsb2 series Radar and Chartplotter displays connected
operation is similar to acombined Pathfinder Radar/Chartplotter Unit: three
full-screen modes – radar, chart and data log are available on all displays.
In addition, if you have an hsb2 series Fishfinder display connected, you can
setanydisplaytofishfindermode;ifthesystemincludesachartplotter,similar
functionality to a combined Fishfinder/Chartplotter is available on all
displays.
On an hsb2 system with Radar, Chart and Fishfinder available, the following
information can be shown on any display unit:
Table 1-2:
Window Options for Integrated Systems
Full-screen mode
Chart Mode,
Half-screen Window Options
CDI, BDI, Nav Data, Fishfinder or Radar
CDI, BDI, Chart or Nav Data
Radar Mode
Fishfinder Mode
Data Log Mode
Depth/temp, Chart or CDI, BDI
Windows not available
For details on the fishfinder, refer to the hsb2 Series Display Owner’s
Handbook supplied with your fishfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-9
Heading and Position Data
Full functionality of the radar/chartplotter is achieved when it is part of an
integrated system with other equipment (in addition to another hsb2 unit)
connected via SeaTalk or NMEA 0183. Data from this equipment including
position and heading is shown on the display and is used in calculations.
Details on connecting other equipment are given in Chapter 8.
Providing Heading Data forMARPA
The performance of MARPA is dependent on the quality of your heading
sensor. It is important that both the heading sensor and the radar scanner
(bearing alignment) are correctly calibrated. Refer to the appropriate heading
sensor and radar scanner handbooks for calibration details. The better the
accuracy of your heading data, the better the performance of MARPA.
Agyrocompassprovidesthebestperformanceinallconditions.Alternatively
you could use a fluxgate compass with rate gyro stabilization.
MARPA requires heading data to be frequently updated (we recommend a
data output rateof greaterthan 8 Hz); heading data musttherefore beprovided
to the display on NMEA.
In multiple-display systems, heading must be connected, via NMEA, to each
display that will be used for MARPA.
We recommend the Pathfinder Smart Heading System (which includes the
Gyro Plus 2 unit). Good results are also obtained with a Raymarine autopilot
system incorporating a 150G or 400G Course Computer with internal rate
gyro.
Other heading sensors connected on NMEA may provide satisfactory results
in reasonable sea states. However, in unsettled conditions a rate gyro compass
is advisable.
Contact Raymarine Customer Services or your authorized Raymarine dealer
for additional information. For specific configuration details with the
Raymarine course computer refer to Appendix E. If you are using a suitable
third party heading sensor, refer to its documentation for installation and
calibration details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
1.2 The Pathfinder Radar PLUS Display
When a scanner is connected and the radar is in Transmit mode, the radar
picture provides a map-like representation of the area in which the radar is
operating. Typically, your ship’s position is at the centre of the display, and its
dead ahead bearing isindicated by avertical heading line, known as the Ship’s
Heading Marker (SHM).
The radar picture can be viewed with a variety of fixed or customised range
scales. A status bar at the top of the radar image displays range, current
heading and mode indicators for the various options you can set.
An example radar picture is shown on the next page, with example radar
returns (echoes) and default Pathfinder Radar information. The Status Bar is
also illustrated.
The radar display can show additional information, depending on your
currently selected options, set up selections and the data available from other
equipment. The example displays on the following pages show some of these
features.
Functions are available to control the display as follows:
• Zoom the Display
• Offset your vessel from the centre of the radar picture
Operation of these functions is described in Chapter 2.
Pathfinder Radar PLUS Display Options
In addition to the display set up options previously described, radar set up
options allow you to customise the radar image by selecting how radar marks
and Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) data are displayed. You can also specify
timed transmit mode and custom range scales.
The Screen Presentation Options, described in Chapter 2 allow you to switch
range rings on/off and waypoint display on/off.
Note:Whenyouturn thedisplayoffandonagain, theScreenPresentationset-
tings are retained in memory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-11
Default Display
Status Bar
RM RV3
RR
1/2
AUTO
T
3nm
126°T
H-UP
IR
Range rings
The number and
spacing depend on
the current range, or
you can turn them off
Targets:
Landmass
Ship's Heading
Marker (SHM)
You can hide this
temporarily
Cursor position,
controlled by the
trackpad
Channel buoy
Ship's position
You can move this
off-centre if required
Surface
vessel
Bearing scale,
each tick indicating
2o of azimuth
CURSOR
BRG
Cursor position box
Shows the current
cursor position as
either Range/Bearing
or Lat/Long. You can
move this box to your
preferred position
on the screen, or
turn it off.
R
045°
RNG 0.28nm
HDG MODE TARGETS
SCREEN
MARPA
Default soft key labels
These can be turned off; press any soft key to re-display them.
Different labels are displayed when you press a key.
D3600-5
Status Bar
Mode Indicators
displayed when function on:
Selected range,
in nautical miles
Range rings
(displayed if
rings are on)
Auto mode
Gain, Sea,
Tune
Target
Expansion
Motion Mode Target Vectors
Relative Motion True Vector or
True Motion
Relative Vector
and vector length
Guard Zone
Alarms
Wakes
RM RV3
WKS EX GZ
FTC RC IR
AUTO
GST
RR
1/2
H-UP
3nm
126°T
Heading mode
Normally Head Up (H-UP);
Course Up (C-UP) or
North Up (N-UP) can be
selected if heading data
Range ring interval Current heading
Rain
Clutter
Not displayed if
if data available, or
Course Over Ground.
Displayed in degrees
Magnetic or True
range rings are off
available
Interference
Rejection
FTC
(Remote rain)
D3993-3
Figure 1-3: Radar Display Features
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
RR
AUTO FTC EX
3nm
CURSOR
1/2 126°T H-UP GST FTC RC IR
TIME
POSITION
BRG 063° R
50°49^13N
13:48:06
RNG
1.65nm 001°12^09W
Data boxes, showing data
(if available) in the selected
units
COG
SOG
SPEED
120@T 6.3kts 5.7kts
DEPTH
14.4m
Mark, symbol selected using
setup options
Mark, default symbol
Active waypoint - from Chartplotter
Offset centre
Long target wake (short,
medium or long wakes can
be selected)
WPT
203°T 1.20nm
Waypoint data box, showing
range, bearing and time to go
01h:30m
D3601-2
Figure 1-4: Typical Radar Picture
Radar Functions
The hsb2 (PLUS) series Pathfinder Radar includes the following functions:
1
• Choice of range scales from /8 nm to 72nm (dependent on scanner type).
• Automatic and manual control of tuning, gain and sea clutter.
• Two Variable Range Markers (VRMs) and Electronic Bearing Lines
(EBLs), allowing target range and bearing measurements.
VRM/EBLs can be floated.
• Target wakes and target expansion mode.
• Two guard zones with alarms.
• Add marks to record important or dangerous locations.
• Man Overboard (MOB) to navigate back to a person or object.
• 10 Target MARPA
Operation of these radar functions is described in Chapter 3 and Chapter 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-13
1.3 The Chartplotter Display
The PLUS series display can includes a Chartplotter. The chartplotter
includes a small-scale world map and detailed navigation information is
depend on the chart zoom level selected. A plotter mode is provided to enable
route plotting and tracking at large scales even when a chart card is not
installed, or when the chart is zoomed beyond the available cartographic
detail. A typical chartplotter screen is shown in Figure 1-5.
The chartplotter uses position information from a GPS, DGPS, WAAS or
Loran-C instrument. Once the position fix has been established, your vessel’s
position, if on screen, is shown as a boat shape pointing in the direction of the
current heading (or COG if heading data is not available). If no heading or
COG data is available, the vessel is shown as a circle.
The chartplotter screen includes a status bar that displays chart scale, with
either cursor position, range and bearing or, when the cursor is homed to the
vessel (by pressing FIND SHIP), vessel position, Speed Over Ground (SOG),
Course Over Ground (COG) and fix type (VES POS, DIF FIX or SD FIX).
The status bar also indicates if radar/chart overlay is switched on.
Any waypoints you have placed are displayed (unless you turned them off in
Chart Set Up as described in Chapter 7) and the current route is shown.
Information can be viewed on-screen by positioning the cursor over a
waypoint, current route or chart object. The chartplotter screen can also show
additional information, depending on your currently selected options, set up
selections and data available from other equipment.
An example chart display, in its default configuration, with a chart card
installed, is shown in the following illustration.
Several functions are available to control the display as follows:
• Zoom in/out and Pan the Display
• Offset the Chart or Center the Chart around the Vessel
• Synchronize the Chart and Radar (if radar data is available)
Operation of these functions is described in Chapter 2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Chartplotter Display Options
In addition to the display set up options previously described, chart set up
options, describedin Chapter 7, allowyouto customize the chartby selecting:
• What cartographic features and level of detail are displayed.
• Chart orientation (north up, head up or course up), datums and position offset.
of chart object identification data.
• Vectors for heading, COG and tide.
The Screen Presentation Options, described in Chapter 2 allow you to switch
the Chart Grid On/Off and Custom Chart Details On/Off.
Note:Whenyouturn thedisplayoffandonagain, theScreenPresentationset-
tings are retained in memory.
Status Bar
Chart Range
Chart Boundary
Waypoint
Vessel Position
Cursor -
selecting chart object
Depth Area
Cursor position box
Shows the current
cursor position as
either Range/Bearing
or Lat/Long. You can
move this box to your
preferred position on
the screen or turn it off.
Object data box -
for object selected
by cursor
Default soft key labels
These can be turned off: press any soft key to redisplay them.
Different labels are displayed when you press a key.
D4275-2
Figure 1-5: Typical Chartplotter Display
Custom Chart Details
The chartplotter set up options include a sub-menu to customize the
cartographic features. This menu allows you to switch features On, Off, or
control them using the CUSTOM soft key. The factory default settings for the
Custom chart options are as follows:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-15
ON:
OFF:
Chart text, chart boundaries, depth contours, navigation marks
and land features.
Caution and routing data.
CUSTOM: Spot sounding, light sectors, marine features.
Icons are displayed in detail, depth shading limit is 10 m and depth contour
display is 0-100 m.
A complete list of chart features is given in Appendix C.
Chartplotter Functions
The Chartplotter includes the following functions:
• Display C-MAP NT C-Card chart information including Ports and Tides
(if available)
• View chart information (if available) for the Nearest Port
• Place, Move, Erase and Edit a Waypoint
• Goto Waypoint or Cursor
• Create, Save, Name, Edit and Follow a Route
• Review Route and Waypoint Lists
• Display vessel’s track; Save and Name the Track for re-call to screen
• SmartRoute to make a track into a route
• Measure Chart Distances and Bearings on-screen
• Set Up Alarms and Timers
• Man OverBoard (MOB) to navigate back to a missing person or object
• Differential GPS set up page
Operation of these functions is described in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
1.4 Operating Controls
You operate the radar and chart using a variety of controls:
• A trackpad providing up, down, left, right and diagonal control of an on-
screen cursor.
• Eleven dedicated (labeled) control keys.
• Four soft keys with labels displayed on the screen.
• Pop-up menus, displayed on-screen, from which you select options.
Note: The cursor is the cross-hair symbol (+) visible on the display. You move
the cursor using the trackpad and use it to select a position or item on the chart.
ThecontrolkeysareshowninFigure 1-6.Theyareback-litfornight-timeuse.
When you use a control, a help message is displayed at the top of the screen
(unless you switch help off as described in Chapter 7). The following
paragraphs describe the controls and on-screen facilities.
Dedicated
keys
Trackpad
Soft keys
Dedicated keys
D3596-3
Figure 1-6: LCD Display Control Keys
Trackpad and Cursor
The trackpad has several functions:
• To move the cursor around the screen
• To select an item from a pop-up menu
• To adjust a variable soft key control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-17
The cursor is used to:
• Select a position on the screen.
• Select an item, e.g.guard zone on the radar, chart object on the chartplotter.
• Select an area of the radar image to zoom into or pan the chart display..
Moving the Cursor
You can press on any of the four sections of the trackpad to move the cursor in
thatdirection (up, down, left orright), or press two sectionsatthe same time to
move diagonally. The cursor moves faster as you continue to press the
trackpad. The current cursor position is shown in the cursor data box (if
selected).
The cursor is normally displayed as a crosshair. However, if you have not
movedthecursorformorethanfiveseconds, whenyounextmoveitthecursor
is outlined by a circle so it is easier to locate on the screen.
Note: During many operations you cannot move the cursor around the
screen;ifyoucannotmovethecursorusingthetrackpad,checkthedefaultsoft
keys are displayed (unless they have been switched OFF in system set up). If
not, press ENTER until they are displayed.
Context-Sensitive Cursor Control
The cursor is context-sensitive. When the cursor is positioned over special
features on the display a text label appears to identify the feature as detailed in
Table 1-3 .
Moving and deleting items with the context-sensitive cursor
Some items on the radar/chartplotter screen have information associated with
them. Most information is displayed in a data box. The context-sensitive
cursor allows you to move databoxes. It also allows you to move or delete
other items, such as radar guard zones. Further details of items that can be
moved or deleted are given in the appropriate sections throughout this
handbook.
➤ To move any data box or selectable item:
1. Usethe trackpad to positionthecursorovertheitem untiltheitem’slabelis
displayed.
2. Press ENTER to take control of the item, use the trackpad to move it to the
required position.
3. Press ENTER again to fix the position, or press CLEAR to abandon the
move.
➤ To delete an item:
1. Usethe trackpad to positionthecursorovertheitem untiltheitem’slabelis
displayed then press CLEAR.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Table 1-3:
Text Label
BOX
Context-Sensitive Cursor Text Labels
Feature
Radar/Chart
Both
Data box (any type)
Man Over Board marker
Radar Mark
MOB
Both
MRK
Both
WPT
Chart Waypoint
Center of radar
Both
CTR
Radar
Radar
Radar
Radar
Radar
Radar
Radar
Chart
FLT
Floating EBL/VRM
Guard zone
GRD
MARPA
SHM
MARPA Target
Ships Heading Marker
VRM and EBL, 1 or 2
Zoom box
VRM/EBL
ZMB
Ruler line
A➟B
COG
Course Over Ground vector
Heading vector
Chart
HDG
Chart
POS
Vessel’s position
Route leg
Chart
RTE
Chart
TIDE
Tide vector
Chart
Dedicated Keys
The dedicated keys: DISPLAY, MARKS, GAIN, VRM/EBL, MULTI,
ALARMS, RANGE, ENTER, CLEAR, MENU and POWER have fixed
functions; the functions are similar on all Pathfinder displays. For example,
ALARMS is used to set up the system alarms on both a chartplotter and a radar.
Some keys can be used in two ways:
• Press: Press the key momentarily and then release it. This method is used
for most key operations.
• Pressandhold:Pressthekeyandholditdownforthelengthoftimestated
(for example, 3 seconds), and then release it.
When you press a dedicated key, one of the following happens:
i. The associated operation is actioned, e.g. change chart scale (RANGE).
ii. A pop-up menu is displayed, providing further options.
iii. A set of soft keys is displayed, providing further functions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Overview
1-19
As you press a key, a single audio beep confirms the key action. If the key-
press is not valid for the current screen or mode, three rapid beeps sound to
indicate that no response is available. If required, you can turn the key beeps
off as part of your set up procedure (see Chapter 7).
Soft Keys
The four keys below the screen are called soft keys because their functions
change according to the operation. The soft keys are grouped into related sets
and subsets providing access to the various functions. The soft key labels are
displayedonthescreenjustabovethekeys.Thedefaultsoftkeysaredisplayed
until you press a key, or select an item on the screen; the soft keys associated
with the action are then displayed.
HDG MODE TARGETS
SCREEN
RDR CHRT
D4152-2
The currently selected soft key option is shown by its gray background. If the
key text is displayed in gray rather than in black, it is not currently available.
When you press a soft key one of the following happens:
i. The associated operation is actioned, e.g. NORTH UP.
ii. A sub-set of soft keys is displayed, providing further functions.
iii. A pop-up menu is displayed, providing further options.
As with dedicated keys, when you press a soft key a single audio beep
confirms the key action. If the key-press is not valid for the current screen or
mode, three rapid beeps sound to indicate that no response is available. If
required, you can turn the key beeps off as part of your set up procedure (see
Chapter 7).
Pop-Up Menus
Pop-up menus usually provide set up options. When a pop-up menu is on-
screen, a set of associated soft keys is also displayed as shown in Figure 1-7.
You use the trackpad to select an option from the menu, then use the
appropriate soft key to set the option. For example, you can toggle the OFF
TRACK ALARM on/off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
ALARMS SET UP
ARRIVAL ALARM
0.01nm
ON
OFF TRACK ALARM
ANCHOR ALARM
OFF
GROUNDING ALARM
COUNTDOWN TIMER
ALARM CLOCK
5M/1.0nm
00:33:00
OFF
SELECT ARRIVAL
ALARM RADIUS
D4265-4
Figure 1-7: Typical Pop-up Menu
Database Lists
The waypoints, routes and tracks that you create on the chartplotter are stored
in database lists. You can view these lists and select items for editing.
WAYPOINT LIST
NAME
SYMBOL
WAYPOINT 001
WAYPOINT 002
WAYPOINT 003
WAYPOINT 004
WAYPOINT 005
POSITION
50°21^966N
001°20^368W
BRG _186°
RNG _21.0nm
TEMP
DEPTH
---°C
---m
DATE
TIME
--/--/--
--:--:--
GOTO
WAYPOINT WAYPOINT WAYPOINT TRANSFER
EDIT
MAKE NEW WAYPOINT
D4262-2
Figure 1-8: Typical Database List
As with pop-up menus, when a database list is on-screen, a set of associated
soft keys is also displayed; you use the trackpad to select an item from the list,
then use the appropriate soft key to edit the item. For example, you can erase a
waypoint or a route.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-1
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the
Display
2.1 Introduction
your display. It will help you to become familiar with the display and the
functions of the controls before you start using the unit. More detailed
information on operating the radar display is provided in Chapter 3 and
Chapter 4. Chartplotter operating details are given in Chapter 5 and
Chapter 6.
Conventions Used
Throughout this handbook, the dedicated (labelled) keys are shown in bold
capitals; for example, MENU. The soft key functions, menu names and
options are shown in normal capitals; for example, SCREEN.
Operating procedures, which may consist of a single key-press or a sequence
of numbered steps, are indicated by a ➤ symbol in the margin.
When theprocedurerequiresyou to pressa softkey, the softkeyicon isshown
in the margin.
Simulator
The display unit includes a simulator function, that allows you to practice
operating your radar or Chartplotter without data from the scanner or GPS
system. You will need to use the set up options to switch the display to
simulator mode, as described in Section 2.2. You can use it in either of two
ways:
• Before the display unit has been installed on your vessel. In this case, you
only need to connect the display to a 12V or 24V DC power supply, con-
necting the red core from the power lead to positive (+) and the black core
• After the display has been installed on your vessel, but while in the marina
or at anchor.
The following section, Section 2.2, includes instructions to view simulated
radar and chart images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
2.2 Switching the Display On and Off
If you have a combined Radar/Chartplotter, the factory default power-up
modeisradar. Onceyouhaveusedthedisplayunititpowers-upinthelastused
mode. The following sections describe the power-up sequence in radar and
chart modes, how to adjust the lighting and how to select simulator mode.
Radar Mode
This section explains how to switch the radar display and scanner on and off,
and how to switch the scanner between Transmit, Standby and Scanner Off
mode.
Younormallyoperateyourradar in transmitmode, butyoucanuse the display
unit without the scanner operating as follows:
Standby mode: You should use this mode when you are not operating the
radar for short time periods. The scanner does not transmit and the antenna
does not rotate, so the radar uses less power. However, the scanner remains
poweredso when youreturntotransmitmode, themagnetrondoesnotneedto
warm up.
Scanner off mode: You should use this mode when you do not require the
radar, but you are using the display unit say, for chart data or to view data from
another source. Scanner off mode removes power from the scanner.
➤ To switch the display on, press and hold the POWER key until the unit beeps.
Iftheunitwaslastused inRadarmode, the keyslightup, the displayshowsthe
Pathfindergraphic, followedbythestart-upinformationillustratedbelow,and
the radar starts the magnetron warm-up sequence.
WARMING UP
Figure 2-1: Switching on the Radar Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-3
After 70 seconds, when the magnetron warm-up sequence is complete, the
Standby screen is displayed, with the text STANDBY and a prompt to press the
POWER key to enter Transmit mode.
➤ To switch the radar scanner from Stand-by mode to Transmit mode, press the
POWER key.
The scanner transmits pulsed energy while it rotates, and the antenna sweep
builds up the radar picture using echoes returned from targets.
Figure 2-2: Radar Transmit Mode
➤ You can switch on and adjust the display backlighting andcontrast as
described later in this chapter.
➤ To switch to Stand-by mode, press the POWER key.
The display returns to the Stand-by screen, and the scanner transmission and
rotation stops.
➤ To use Scanner off mode:
1. Ensure that the radar is in Standby mode, warming up, or (if the unit is a
Repeater) displaying a message that radar data is not available.
2. Press the CLEAR key. The message STANDBY. RADAR DATA NOT AVAILABLE
appears in the radar picture. The scanner is powered down and the timer, if
running, is cleared.
To return to radar operation, press the POWER key. The warm-up countdown
isdisplayedandtheradargoesintoStandbymode. YoupressPOWER againto
switch to Transmit mode when required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Chart Mode
➤ To switch the display on, press and hold the POWER key until the unit beeps.
If the display was last used in chartplotter mode, the keys light up and the
Raychart graphic is displayed, followed by the caution:
CAUTION:
Raychart chart displays are based on cartographic data that
C-MAP believes to be accurate. However, you should not rely on these
displays as your primary source of navigation. Rather, your Raychart
should be used only as a backup to official government charts and
traditional methods of navigation.
When you have readand understood the caution, presstheCONTINUE soft key.
The chart is displayed.
If this is the first time the chartplotter has been turned on, and no chart card is
installed, the display shows the small-scale world map and the default soft
keys. Otherwise, the display shows the selected chart area and any data that
were displayed when the display was last used.
Until unit beeps
D4277-2
Figure 2-3: Switch On - Chart Mode
Switch Off
➤ To switch the scanner and display unit off, press and hold the POWER key for
three seconds. A countdown timer is displayed as shown below:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-5
GAIN
VRM/EBL
MULTI
DISPLAY
MARKS
Countdown timer:
number of seconds
to power off
POWER OFF IN
3s
ALARMS
RANGE
POWER
ENTER
CLEAR
MENU
3
SECONDS
D3599-1
Figure 2-4: Switch Off
When the counter reaches zero a beep sounds, and the display unit switches
off. Release the POWER key.
Note: Switch the display unit off before you remove the power cord.
Note: You do not need to change to Standby mode before turning off the dis-
play: if you turn the radar display off while it is in Transmit mode, the scanner
is also de-activated.
Simulator Mode
When simulator mode is on a simulator data box is displayed.
When thedisplayisswitchedoffthen on again, simulatormode ismaintained.
It is recommended that you select the System Set Up Menu and switch off
simulator mode when you have finished.
➤ To view a simulated image:
MENU
1. Press MENU followed by the SYSTEM SET UP soft key.
SYSTEM
SET UP¬
The set up menu pop-up is displayed.
2. UsethetrackpadtomovetheselectionbarovertheoptionSIMULATOR.The
simulator soft keys are displayed.
3. In the system set up menu, press RADAR to view a simulated radar image,
DATA to view the chart display with simulated position, or BOTH to view
simulated radar and chart data.
4. Press ENTER twice to return to the default display.
Note: Any waypoints placed on the chartplotter in simulator mode are re-
tained in the database list and are available for use in routes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Changing the Lighting & Contrast
You can change the level of backlighting and contrast for the screen and keys.
The key lighting is set the same as the screen lighting, except that it remains
switched on at its lowest level even when the screen lighting is turned off, so
that you can always find the keys.
➤ To change the lighting and contrast:
1. Press the MULTI key to display the soft key controls:
The last-used softkey is highlighted in inverse video (white text on a black
background).
If you press MULTI during the magnetron warm-up sequence countdown,
only the LIGHT and CONTRAST sliders are displayed, and the lighting is
automatically switched on at its last-used level.
ON
O
F
F
A
U
T
O
25%
50%
ALARM
LIGHT
CONTRAST
TUNE
D3935-3
75%
2. To select a control (if it is not already highlighted) press the soft key.
Alternatively, you can press the trackpad left and right edges to move side-
ways between the controls to select the soft key.
LIGHT
3. If necessary, press the soft key to toggle the control ON/OFF.
4. Use the trackpad (up or down) to increase or decrease the setting (between
0 and 100 in 1% steps). You can press and hold the trackpad to change the
setting more rapidly. The lighting/contrast level is adjusted as you change
the setting.
50%
CONTRAST
5. PressENTERtoremovethesoftkeyslidersandreturntothedefaultscreen,
with the new lighting and contrast levels retained, or press CLEAR to dis-
card the changes and return to the default screen.
If lights are left ON when you switch off the display, the next time the display
is switched on, the lightswillbe ON, butatthe default setting of 40%. The new
contrast level is retained until you reset it, unless you set the control very low
or very high; in this case, the contrast will be restored as follows:
Contrast set < 30% restored to 30%
Contrast set > 70 % restored to 70%
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-7
2.3 Controlling the Display
You control the display using the cursor and control keys. You start all
operations from the default screen, that is the default soft keys are displayed:
Chart
ROUTE
GOTO
SCREEN FIND SHIP
D4160-1
Radar
HDG MODE TARGETS
SCREEN
MARPA
D4152-3
When you have completed an action using the soft keys, press ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the default screen; you may need to press ENTER or
CLEAR several times to back-track through the soft key hierarchy.
Note: If you have set up your system so that the default soft keys are not dis-
played all the time, press any soft key to display the labels.
The remainder of this section describes how to select the mode of operation
and switch half-screen windows on/off. The following sections describe how
to set up the display for the Radar and for the Chart.
The controls are summarized in the fold-out illustration on pages 2-11
and 2-12 .
You use the DISPLAY key to select the full-screen mode.
If the data is available on your system, the following modes (described on
Operating Modes on page 1-6) can be selected:
• Radar
• Chart
• Data log
The DISPLAY key also accesses the soft keys for the half-screen window
options.
Note: If your hsb2 display system includes a Fishfinder display, refer to the
Owner’s Handbook supplied with your Fishfinder for operating details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
➤ To changethemode, pressthe DISPLAY keytoshowtheDISPLAYpop-up, then
press again to cycle through the modes available, shown in the Figure 2-5.
DISPLAY
Figure 2-5: Using the DISPLAY Key
The selected mode is shown by an icon with a red border and the mode is
displayed on the screen. The associated half-screen window soft keys are also
displayed.
When the required mode is shown, press ENTER or CLEAR. The default soft
keys are displayed. The selected mode is shown full-screen; in Radar and
Chart mode you can switch on half-screen windows for additional display, as
described in the following section.
If you press DISPLAY again, the pop-up and soft keys for the current mode are
shown.
Selecting a Half-Screen Window for Display
Note: Windows can only be used with Radar or Chart screens, they are not
available on the data log screen.
➤ To select a window for display:
1. From the full-screen Radar or Chart mode, press the DISPLAY key. The
following soft are displayed with an image of each available window:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-9
Radar:
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
ZOOM
OFF ON
DISPLAY
D4156-3
Chart
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
DISPLAY
D4156-2
2. To select a different window, press either SELECT WINDOWS soft key until
on. Press ENTER.
3. To toggle windows off, press the WINDOWS OFF ON soft key.
Figure 2-6 shows the half-screen horizontal windows (in radar mode).
Switching Control Between Radar & Chart Screens
In a combined or an integrated system, to switch control between radar and
chart, you can change the full-screen mode using the DISPLAY key.
Alternatively, when you have both radar and chart displayed in half-screen
windows the soft key RDR CHRT lets you toggle operating control between the
radar and the chart window.
If a window is active, i.e. control of the cursor via the trackpad is available in
thatwindow, and youswitch windows off, controlautomatically returnsto the
full-screen (upper window) mode.
Radar:
HDG MODE TARGETS
MORE¬
RDR CHRT
D5668_1
Chart:
ROUTE
GOTO
MORE¬
RDR CHRT
D4168-1
➤ To change the active window, press the RDR CHRT soft key to toggle control
between the radar and chart display. The current active display is highlighted
in red on the RDR CHRT label and the cursor appears in that window.
Returning to the Full-Screen Display
To return to the full-screen display you can turn windows off, as previously
described. Alternatively, to return to full-screen display:
DISPLAY
➤ Press and hold the DISPLAY key for 2 seconds to return to the currently
selected full-screen (upper window) display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
CDI Window
BDI Window
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOW
ZOOM
OFF ON
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOW
ZOOM
OFF ON
Navdata Window
Chart Window
RDR CHRT
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOW
ZOOM
OFF ON
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOW
ZOOM
OFF ON
D4150-1
Figure 2-6: Radar Half-Screen Window Options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-11
FOLD OUT SHEET RADAR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
FOLD OUT SHEET CHART
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-13
Customizing the Screen Presentation Options
TheSCREENsoftkey lets youswitch thefollowing screenpresentationoptions
on or off:
Radar:
SCREEN
CRSR BOX RNGE RNGS DATABOXES WAYPOINT
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
D3643-2
Chart:
CRSR BOX CHRT GRID DATABOXES CUSTOM
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
D4177-1
Switching the Cursor Data Box On and Off
Thecursordata boxprovidesthecursor’s position in latitude/longitudeand/or
bearing/range. If you wish to see a full image, you can switch the data box off.
➤ To control the cursor data box:
1. Press the SCREEN soft key.
SCREEN
2. Pressthe CRSR BOX softkey totogglethesettingfromOFFto ONorfrom ON
CRSR BOX
OFF ON
to OFF.
3. To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER.
➤ Youcan use thecontextsensitivecursortoselectandmove thecursordatabox
(the label BOX is displayed). See Moving and deleting items with the context-
sensitive cursor on page 1-17
BOX
The radar range rings can be turned on or off. They are normally left on, but
youmaywishtoturnthemoffifyouareusingVRM/EBLsorguardzones(see
Section 3.4 and Section 3.5) to make the display clearer.
The Chartplotter display includes grid lines of latitude and longitude which
you can use to help determine position on the chart. The grid lines can be
switched on if required.
If you are in Chart mode the RNGE RNGS soft key is replaced by the CHRT GRID
soft key.
➤ To turn the range rings or chart grid on or off:
SCREEN
1. Press the SCREEN default soft key.
2. Press the RANGE RINGS or theCHRTGRID soft key to toggle the setting from
RNGE RNGS
OFF ON
OFF to ON or from ON to OFF.
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Data Boxes
Agroupofuptosixdataboxescanbedisplayed, iftheinformationisavailable
on your system. You select which data is displayed in the boxes during
system set up as described in Chapter 7:Setting Up the System Defaults.
The default data box positions are along the bottom of the display. Each box
canbemovedtotherequiredpositiononthescreenusingthecontext-sensitive
cursor.
Note: If youselect BDI, CDIor Nav Data fordisplay in a half-screen window,
the data boxes are temporarily hidden.
At any time, you can switch the groupofdataboxes onoroffusingtheSCREEN
soft key. When first installed, the boxes are all OFF. When the display unit is
switched off and on again, the data boxes return to their last-used states (ON or
OFF) and positions.
SCREEN
Note:The SCREEN softkeydoesnotcontrol theninedata boxesthatcan be dis-
played in the half-screen window.
➤ To switch the group of data boxes on or off:
1. Press the SCREEN default soft key.
SCREEN
2. Press the DATABOXES soft key to toggle the setting from ON to OFF or from
DATABOXES
OFF ON
OFF to ON.
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER.
If you turn the data boxes on and none are displayed, you need to select the
ones you require using the system set up menu, as described in Section 7.3,
System Set Up Parameters.
➤ You can use the context sensitive cursor to select and move any data box (the
label BOX is displayed). See Moving and deleting items with the context-
sensitive cursor on page 1-17
BOX
Waypoint Display - Radar mode
If you are currently going to a waypoint, you can display the active waypoint
on the radar picture. The waypoint may have been generated locally on the
chartplotter, or received via the SeaTalk or NMEA interface.
Note:Ifyouuse the GOTO CURSORfunction, theactivecursoris displayedasa
lollipop symbol on the radar.
➤ To display the active waypoint:
1. Press the SCREEN soft key.
SCREEN
2. Press the WAYPOINT soft key to toggle the setting ON.
WAYPOINT
OFF ON
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-15
The standard radar picture is displayed again, with the active waypoint joined
to your vessel’s position by a dotted line. If the waypoint is off-screen, the
dotted line is extended to the edge of the radar picture.
Active waypoint
D3989-2
Custom Options - Chart mode
When chart details have been customized in the Chart Set Up menu (as
describedinSection 7.7)theSCREEN softkeycanbeusedtoswitchthecustom
chart options off or on:
When set to ON, all chart options set to CUSTOM in the Customize Chart menu
are displayed; when set to OFF, options set to CUSTOM are not shown.
The factory default for custom chart options is ON.
➤ To switch the customized options on or off:
1. Press the SCREEN default soft key.
SCREEN
2. Press the CUSTOM soft key to toggle the setting from OFF to ON or from ON
CUSTOM
OFF ON
to OFF.
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
2.4 Radar Display Control Functions
This section describes how to use the radar controls to:
• Use the zoom function to enlarge a selected area.
• Offset the center of the radar display.
• Momentarily hide the ship’s heading marker (SHM).
Using the Zoom Function
If you wish to see a section of the radar picture in more detail, you can use the
Zoomfunction tomagnify theselectedareatotwiceits size. Theenlargedarea
is displayed in a quarter-screen Zoom Window in the lower right corner of the
screen. A box in the original radar picture indicates the enlarged area; you can
move this using the context-sensitive cursor, changing the image in the Zoom
Window.
Note: If the area you wish to enlarge is in the quarter of the screen that will be
covered by the Zoom Window, you should offset the centre (see the next sec-
tion) to move the area to another part of the screen before selecting Zoom
mode.
Note: You cannot use Zoom and Windowsatthesametime: if you turn oneon,
the other is turned off automatically, and restored when the first is turned off
again.
➤ To enlarge an area:
1. Press the DISPLAY key. The soft keys are updated.
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
ZOOM
OFF ON
DISPLAY
D4156-3
2. Press the ZOOM soft key to toggle the Zoom function ON.
The labels are cleared, and the cursor has control of the zoom box that
indicates the area to be enlarged. This is indicated by the letters ZMB in
inverse video, and the four-headed cursor symbol. The zoom box defaults
to its last-used position since power-on.
3. Use the trackpad to move the zoom box to the required area, and press
ENTER.
The selected area is shown in an enlarged format in the quarter-screen
Zoom window. The original radar picture occupies the rest of the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
➤ You can use the context sensitive cursor to select and move the enlarged area
in view in the window (the label ZMB is displayed). See Moving and deleting
ZMB
items with the context-sensitive cursor on page 1-17.
RR
AUTO
1/2
3nm
126°T
H-UP
T
IR
Zoom Box, indicating the
enlarged area. You can move this
using the context-sensitive cursor,
to change the image in the Zoom
Window
ZMB
Zoom Box cursor text
RADAR ZOOM ( x2 )
Zoom Window, providing a
times 2 enlargement of the area
shown in the Zoom Box
CURSOR
BRG 033° R
RNG 1.78nm
D3972-1
➤ To return to the normal display, press DISPLAY and then press the ZOOM soft
key to set the function OFF.
Alternatively, you can press and hold DISPLAY for 2 seconds. This also
removes any grouped data boxes.
Offsetting the Center
The radar picture is normally shown with your vessel at the center of the
display. However, you can move the center, so that your vessel is offset by up
to 66% of the radius, anywhere on the screen.
Note: You cannot offset the center when the radar display is set to the longest
range scale.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
➤ You use the context sensitive cursor to select and move the center of the radar
picture (the label CTR is displayed). See Moving and deleting items with the
context-sensitive cursor on page 1-17
CTR
DEPTH
14.4m
Bearing scale markers
adjusted to point
towards the offset
centre position
Offset centre
WPT
203°T 1.20nm
01h:30m
D3973-1
Figure 2-8: Radar Display with an Offset Center
➤ To return the center of the radar picture to the center of the screen, select the
center point (CTR ) then press the CLEAR key. The center is always reset to the
center of the display when you turn on the Radar display.
CTR
Note: When the center is offset, additional range rings are displayed to the
edge ofthe radarpicture, atthe standard ringinterval forthecurrentrange. If
you have selected the longest range scale, you cannot offset the center.
Hiding the Ship’s Heading Marker (SHM)
Theradarpictureincludestheship’sheadingmarker, whichisalinefromyour
vessel’s position to the edge of the picture at the vessel’s current heading. In
the standard Head Up mode, the heading marker is always a vertical line.
If you wish to check for small targets that may be hidden under the heading
marker, you can hide it momentarily using the context-sensitive cursor.
➤ To hide the heading marker:
1. Position the cursor over the heading marker, so that the text SHM is dis-
played.
2. Press and hold CLEAR. The heading marker is hidden until you release the
CLEAR key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-19
2.5 Chart Display Control Functions
Moving Around the Chart
You will normally operate the chartplotter with the chart showing your
vessel’s current location. The default orientation is North-Up, and the vessel
moves across the screen. You will need to move the chart if your vessel moves
out of the area currently displayed, or if you wish to examine or place
waypoints in another area. Alternatively, you can home the cursor onto the
vessel using FIND SHIP.
There are four ways in which you can move the chart:
• Use the trackpad to move the cursor to the edge of the chart. The chart will
pan across. This method is useful if the area you wish to see is only just off
the screen.
• Use the context-sensitive cursor to change the chart center.
• Automatically re-center the vessel using the FIND SHIP soft key.
• Change the chartscale to zoom outandin to a new areacentered on the cur-
sor position. This method is useful if the area you wish to see is a long dis-
tance away.
Changing the Chart Center
You can move the area of the chart displayed on the screen using the context-
sensitive cursor. This allows you to center your vessel in the middle of the
screen, or to move the chart so that your vessel is displayed off-center
anywhere on the screen.
➤ To center the chart:
1. Usethetrackpadtomovethecursortothevessel’sposition. Thecursortext
POS
POS is displayed.
center of the screen.
➤ You use the context sensitive cursor to select and move your vessel’s position
off-center (the label POS is displayed). See Moving and deleting items with the
context-sensitive cursor on page 1-17.
POS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
D4278-1
Figure 2-9: Changing the Chart Center
Using FIND SHIP
FINDSHIP isusedinchartmodetore-drawthechartwiththevesselatthecenter
and the cursor homed onto the vessel.
ROUTE
GOTO
SCREEN FIND SHIP
D4160-1
When you press FIND SHIP the following occur:
• The chart is re-drawn with the vessel’s position in the center.
• The cursor is homed onto the vessel position and moves with it.
• When the vessel moves near the edge of the chart window, the chart is
redrawn to place the vessel and cursor at the center again.
• The status bar indicates vessel position, speed and course over ground.
➤ To release the cursor from homed mode press the trackpad to move the cursor
away from the vessel’s current position. The status bar shows the cursor
position, range and bearing.
Synchronize the Radar and Chart
If you have a combined radar/chartplotter display, with chart and radar
windows on and you have selected Radar/Chart Synch in Chart Set Up
(Section 7.7, Chart Set Up Parameters), FIND SHIP can be used to synchronize
the radar and chart images. When you press FIND SHIP the following occur:
• The chart isredrawn so thatits centerposition matches that of the radar dis-
play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-21
• The radar is redrawn to the scale and heading mode of the chart.
• The radar is set to True motion so that the radar and chart images remain
synchronised as the vessel moves.
Note: Depending on the topology of the coastline, the radar returns may not
relate to the charted shoreline, the radar image will therefore be different to
the chart display. For example, a gently sloping beach with a cliff severalhun-
dred metres beyond the charted coastline, the cliff is not shown on the chart
but will be displayed on the radar image.
Changing the Chart Scale
The RANGE key allows you to change the chart scale so that you can see a
smaller or larger area on the screen.
Plotter mode is available to allow you to zoom into a smaller area, even when
nochart data is available for thatscale. Section 7.7describes how to set plotter
mode on/off.
You can change the chart scale for two purposes:
• To see either more detail (of a smaller area) or a larger area (in less detail)
on the screen.
• To move the display to another area of the chart, by zooming out to a small
scale chart, then zooming in on another position centered on the cursor.
The cartographic detail available on charts varies according to the chart scale
and some areas include detail at smaller scales than others. This can cause
blank areas on the display when adjacent areas with different levels of detail
are displayed. To reduce this affect you can use the Chart Set Up options (see
Section 7.7)tosetchartdisplaydetailtosimple. Then, asyouzoomin, charted
areas are displayed but with less detail shown.
Each time you press the RANGE key, the chart scale changes to the next
available setting. The status bar indicates the distance from top to bottom of
the screen, in nautical miles.
Vertical distance
Increases the
displayed on chart
chart distance
RANGE
CSR 50 45'980N
POS 001 01'490W
Decreases the
chart distance
6nm
Status Bar
D4175_1
Figure 2-10: Changing the Chart Scale
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
➤ To change the scale quickly, press and hold the required arrow on the RANGE
key.
RANGE
The distance indicator at the left-hand end of the status bar is updated
whenever you change the chart scale.
➤ To zoom in to a larger-scale (more detailed) chart:
1. Use the trackpad to position the cursor in the area you wish to see in more
detail.
2. Press the lower part of the RANGE key to zoom into the area.
The section of the chart around the cursor is enlarged to fill the screen with
a larger-scale chart showing more detail. The cursor is now positioned in
the center of the screen.
RANGE
The distance indicated at the top left of the screen is updated.
can press the bottom of the RANGE key to zoom in again, re-positioning
the cursor first if required.
An area of further chart detail is indicated by a box around the area as
shown in Figure 2-11.
Chart Boundary -
indicates further
detail is available inside
D4279-1
Figure 2-11: Chart Boundaries
4. When no further chart detail is available, as you press the bottom of the
RANGE key, the effect depends on whether Plotter Mode is on or off as
follows:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-23
• If Plotter Mode is Off, the chart scale remains unchanged, indicating
the smallest chart scale is displayed.
Note: If Plotter Mode is Off and the cursor is homed to the vessel (see
Using FIND SHIP onpage 2-20), if the vessel moves outside an area of
available cartography, the chart will automatically re-scale to the next
range with cartography.
• IfPlotter Mode isOn, the scale isdecreased and the message NOCHART
DATA is displayed. The vessel, waypoints, routes and tracklines are dis-
played without cartography.
Thechartinformationisrestoredwhenyoureturntoachartscaleforwhichthe
information is available.
➤ Tozoomouttoasmaller-scale(lessdetailed)chart, simplypresstheupperpart
RANGE
of the RANGE key as many times as required.
2.6 Typical Chart Scenarios
Thefollowingillustrationsprovideoperatingguidelinesfortypicalnavigation
scenarios. These scenarioscan be used asa trainingguide; they show you how
to perform a particular operation and they introduce many of the chartplotter
functions.
Each scenarioindicatesthekey pressesrequiredtoperformparticular tasks. A
typical chartplotter screen image is shown for each task.
The scenarios assume you have read the previous sections of this chapter and
that you are familiar with the Operating Controls. Full operating details for
each function are provided in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6.
Operating guidelines are provided for the following scenarios:
• Working with Waypoints
Place a Waypoint
Goto a Waypoint
• Make and Follow a Route
Create a Route
Follow a Route
• Review the Passage Plan
View Route Information
Change the SOG, Hours and ETA.
• Displaying the Radar Image and Synchronizing Radar & Chart
Changing the Full-Screen Mode & Selecting Half-Screen Windows
Radar and Chart Synchronization (Find Ship)
Cursor Echo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-25
4
The vessel navigates towards the target
waypoint
See:
5.3 Working wth Waypoints
Go to an individual Target Point,
page 5-26.
D4267-2a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Make and Follow a Route
#
1
Press the soft key
2
Press the soft key
3
1. Position Cursor - in this example
over an existing waypoint
2. Press the soft key
4
Position Cursor for next waypoint,
then press soft key.
Repeat to plot all waypoints in
sequence.
D4268-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-27
5
Press the soft key. The route becomes
the current route.
6
Press the soft key
7
Press the soft key
8
The vessel starts to navigate to the
first (target) waypoint in the route.
See:
5.4 Working wth routes,
Follow a route, page 5-24.
Other Follow Options, page 5-25.
D4268-2a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Review Your Passage Plan
1
Press the soft key
Press the soft key
Press the soft key
2
3
4
1. Use the trackpad to move
selection bar over required route.
2. Press the soft key
5
Time defaults to ETA - and assumes
the current time is the start time.
D4269-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-29
6
See:
Displaying Route Information
page 5-18.
Change the TIME to HOURS - the display
indicates it will take 32 minutes to reach
the destination. You can change the
PLANNED SOG; the display updates to
indicate TIME required at the planned
speed.
D4269-2a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Displaying the Radar and Synchronizing Radar & Chart
1
1. Press DISPLAY -- then press
twice more to select RADAR.
2. Press the soft keys to set windows
ON. The Chart window is the default
selection.
3. Press ENTER.
2
ROUTE
GOTO
MORE¬
RDR CHRT
Press the soft key. You can control
the chart cursor.
3
1. Press MENU.
2. Press the soft key
D4293-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: Getting Started & Adjusting the Display
2-31
f
4
1. Move selection bar over
Radar/Chart Synch.
2. Press the soft key.
3. Press ENTER twice.
5
6
Press the soft key.
Press the soft key to synchronise the
chart & radar images.
7
The radar and chart windows are
synchronised and the cursor is
'homed' on the vessel
Move the chart cursor - you can see
chart cursor move on the radar
screen.
You can move the cursor over
a radar target to determine its
identity on the chart
See:
2.3 Controlling the Display
6.5 Cursor Echo
7.3 System Parameters
7.6 Chart Set Up
D4293-1a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-1
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3.1 Introduction
This chapter provides detailed instructions for the standard operations of your
Pathfinder radar. Additional functions, that are available on integrated
systemswithappropriatedatasources, aredescribedinChapter 4. Ifyou have
a combined radar/chart display refer to Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 for
information on charting operations.
You can usethis chapter with theradar display set to simulatormode, oron the
water after you have installed and set up your Pathfinder system.
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Range control.
• Interpreting and adjusting the radar picture, including adjusting the gain,
sea clutter and rain clutter, changing the targets display, and tuning the
radar.
• Measuring range (distances) and bearings using Variable Range Markers
(VRMs) and Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs).
• Setting up guard zones and handling alarms.
• Using MARPA for target tracking and risk analysis.
Note: Until you are familiar with interpreting the radar display, you should
take every opportunity to compare the radar’s display patterns with visual
targets, such as other vessels, buoys and coastal structures. You should prac-
ticeharbour and coastalnavigation during daylight andin clear weathercon-
ditions.
If you have a combined radar/chartplotter or have an hsb2 series Chartplotter
as part of an integrated system,you can identify objects using the cursor echo
feature:With cursor echo on(see Section 4.5and Chapter 7) you canselectan
object on the radar display, the cursor is repeated on the chart display so you
can check the object’s identity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
3.2 Range Control
The radar picture can be viewed at various scales. The shortest range scale
1
gives a maximum range of /8 nautical miles, measured from the default centre
to the top of the radar picture. The longest range scale gives a maximum range
of between 24 and 72 nautical miles depending on your scanner.
• The long range scales provide the best overview of your vessel’s relation-
ship to land masses, weather fronts and large ship targets in or beyond
view.
• The short range scales provide greater detail of the radar echoes close to
your vessel, and should be used as you approach the coastline, harbour or
other vessels in the area.
can use to help you to judge distances on the radar picture. Their number and
spacing are adjusted automatically if you change the range scale. They can be
turned off (see Switching Radar Range Rings or Chart Grid On and Off on
page 2-13).
The Standard Range Scale
Details of the standard ranges that can be selected are shown in the table
below. If you wish, you can customize the range scales by specifying different
ranges, as described in Section 7.4, Radar Set Up Parameters.
Table 3-1:
Radar Range Scales
Maximum Range
(nm)
Number of Range
Rings
Range Ring Interval
(nm)
0.125
0.25
0.5
2
2
4
3
0.0625
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.75
1.5
3
6
6
0.25
0.5
6
12
24*
48*
72*
6
6
6
6
6
1
2
4
8
12
* The maximum range depends on your scanner type, as detailed in the Pathfinder Plus Radar
Scanner Owner’s Handbook.
The number of range rings shown in the table is the number to the selected
range. Additional range rings are displayed to the edge of the radar picture, at
the standard ring interval for the current range, and are visible when the centre
is offset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-3
Changing the Range
Selected
range scale spacing
Range ring
Increases
the range scale
RANGE
RR
1nm
Decreases
the range scale
6nm
343°T
Status Bar
D3939_1
Figure 3-1: Changing the Radar Range
➤ Each time you press the RANGE key, the range changes to the next available
RANGE
AUTO MAN
setting. The system will beep three times if no further range scale is available.
➤ To change the range quickly, press and hold the required arrow on the RANGE
key.
The range scale and range ring interval indicators, at the left-hand end of the
status bar, are updated whenever you change the range.
The actual maximum radar range is essentially line-of-sight, and is limited by
the height of the scanner and the height of the target as shown in Figure 3-1.
Table 3-2 lists some range examples:
R
max
a1
a2
Earth
Radar
R
= 2.23 (
h
+
H
)
Cliff
max
R
h
H
maximum radar range
radar antenna height
target height
in nautical miles
in metres
in metres
max
R
= radar horizon of antenna (a1) + radar horizon of target (a2)
max
D1643-2
Figure 3-2: Determining Radar Range
Table 3-2: Radar Range
Antenna Height (m) Target Height (m)
Maximum Range (nm)
3
3
5
5
3
7.8
10
3
10.9
8.9
10
12.0
Note: The ranges shown in the table are theoretical maximum ranges. The ra-
dar horizon is greater than the optical horizon, but the radar can only detect
targets if a large enough target is above the radar horizon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
3.3 Interpreting and Adjusting the Radar Picture
Navigational echoes may be large, small, bright or faint, depending not only
on the size of the object but also on its orientation and surface. Different
objects reflect the radar signals in different ways. For example, vertical
objects such as cliffs reflect signals better than sloping ones such as
sandbanks.
High coastlines and mountainous coastal regions can be observed at the
longestradarrange. However, thefirstsightoflandmaybeamountainseveral
miles inland from the coastline. The actual coastline may not appear on the
radar until the vessel is close to the line of sight distance.
The radar indication may not be similar to your visual observation; a nearby
small object may appear to be the same size as a distant large object on the
radar. However, with experience the approximate size of different objects can
be determined by the relative size and brightness of the echoes.
Some targets, such as buoys and small boats, can be difficult to differentiate,
since they bob and toss about in the waves and do not present a consistent
reflecting surface. Consequently, these echoes have a tendency to fade and
brighten and, at times, to disappear momentarily. Buoys and small boats often
resemble each other, but boats can usually be distinguished by their motion.
Not all radar echoes are produced by hard navigational items. Some echoes
may be received from irregularities on the surface of the water, particularly at
close range (sea clutter), or fromrain or snow either around the vessel orin the
distance. Inaddition, someechoesmaybeindirectreturnstotheradarscanner,
providing false echoes or multiple echoes.
Theeffectsofmanyfalseechoescanbeminimized,andthetargetpresentation
clarified using the controls summarized below. This section explains how to
interpret the radar picture and how the controls affect the display. It provides
instructions for adjusting the settings, describes the circumstances in which
they should be adjusted, and how they interact with each other.
Table 3-3:
Controls to Adjust the Radar Picture
Control
GAIN
Option
Function
Default Setting
GAIN
SEA
Controls the strength of the target returns
Reduces sea returns
AUTO
AUTO-HARBOUR
RAIN
FTC
Reduces close rain or snow returns
Reduces distant rain or snow returns
OFF
OFF
MULTI
TUNE
Fine tunes the receive
AUTO
TARGETS INT REJ
Soft Key
Turns interference rejection on/off
ON
OFF
EXPANSION Turns target expansion on/off
WAKES
Turns wakes on/off and selects wakes length OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-5
Identifying False Echo Returns
Not all echoes are direct returns to the radar antenna. Occasionally signals
appear at positions where there is no actual target. These are called false
echoes, and may be caused by side lobes, ghost images, indirect echoes or
multiple echoes.
This section briefly describes the echo patterns that can be produced by false
echoes and the likely cause. It should be noted that the radar operator, through
observation, practice, and experience, can generally detect these conditions
very quickly. These effects can usually be minimized using the radar controls.
A small part of the RF energy from each transmitted pulse is radiated outside
the single narrow beam. This produces side lobe patterns, shown in
Figure 3-3.
Side lobes have no effect on distant or small surface objects. However, the
echo from a large object at short range may produce an arc on the radar screen
similar to a range ring or a series of echoes forming a broken arc. Side-lobe
echoes normally occur at ranges below 3nm, and can be reduced by adjusting
the SEA control.
Main lobe
Side lobe
Side lobe
Antenna
Arc
True echo
Side echoes
D1638-2
Figure 3-3: Side Lobes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Indirect Echoes
Thereareseveraltypesofindirectechoesorghostimages-someexamplesare
shown in Figure 3-4. These sometimes have the appearance of true echoes,
but in general they are intermittent and poorly defined.
Indirect (false) echoes
True echo
False echo
True echo
Passing
ship
Mast
or funnel
False echo
D1641-2
Figure 3-4: Indirect Echoes
Multiple Echoes
Multiple echoes appear if there is a large target with a wide vertical surface at
a comparatively short range. The transmitted signal will be reflected back and
forth between the target and your own ship. Multiple echoes therefore appear
beyond the true target’s echo on the same bearing, as shown in Figure 3-5.
This is not very common.
True echo
MULTIPLE ECHOES
Multiple echoes
D1642-1
Figure 3-5: Multiple Echoes
Blind Sectors or Shadow Effect
Funnels and masts located near the antenna, may cause shadows. In shadow
areas beyond the obstruction there will be a reduction of the beam intensity,
although not necessarily a complete cut-off. However, there will be a blind
sector if the subtended angle is more than a few degrees. There may also be
multiple echoes which extend behind the obstruction. This should be avoided
by careful selection of the scanner site prior to installation (Chapter 8).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-7
Adjusting Gain, Sea Clutter, Rain Clutter and Tune
Automatic adjustment of Gain, Sea and Tune is available, alternatively you
can set any of these parameters to manual and use the trackpad to adjust its
value. Rain clutter is adjusted manually using the RAIN or FTC control. GAIN,
SEA, RAIN and FTC are accessed fromthe GAIN key; TUNE is accessed from the
MULTI key. We recommend that you leave the TUNE control in Auto mode.
GAIN
MULTI
Note: Gain, Sea and Tune can only be adjusted if the control is set to Manual
adjustment.
MANUAL
75%
MANUAL
50%
O
F
F
O
F
F
FTC
RAIN
SEA
GAIN
D3936-3
When you select manual GAIN, SEA or TUNE adjustment the soft key icon
shows a vertical slider bar. As you press the trackpad, the value is indicated in
the slider.
When you switch FTC or RAIN On, the soft key icon shows a vertical slider bar.
As you press the trackpad, the value is indicated in the slider.
If you change the settings, the new GAIN, SEA and TUNE modes (auto or
manual) and values remain set even when you turn the radar off and on again;
Rain and FTC are reset to Off at power-on. The status bar indicates which
controls are switched to Auto or On, as shown in Figure 3-6.
Status Bar
Gain, Sea and/or Tune set to Auto
TM TV3
H-UP
AUTO WKS EX GZ
GST FTC RC IR
RR
1/2
3nm
126°T
FTC on
Rain on
D3987-3
Figure 3-6: Radar Status Bar
➤ To adjust a parameter:
1. Select a range appropriate to the adjustment you wish to make. The opti-
mum Tune setting varies slightly for different ranges, depending on the
pulse width used.
GAIN
2. Press GAIN or MULTI. The slider soft keys are displayed. The last-used
MULTI
slider is highlighted (displayed in inverse video) to show that it is selected.
3. Press the required soft key so that the slider box is highlighted.
The TUNEand GAIN soft keys toggle the control between Auto and Manual
mode. The SEA soft key toggles the control between Auto-Harbour, Auto-
OffshoreandManualmode.IfyouselectManualmodethelastautosetting
is retained. You can only move the slider if the control is set to Manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
4. Use the trackpad to move the slider up ordown. You can press and hold the
control to move the slider quickly rather than in single steps.
Theimageonthescreenchangesasyoumovetheslider, sothatyoucansee
the effect of your adjustment.
IfyouselectMANUALTUNE adjustment, an8-stepsignal-strengthindicator
bar is displayed above the slider. Adjust the slider to obtain the maximum
reading on the indicator.
Note: Because the changes to the settings are made immediately, you cannot
revert to the previous setting by pressing CLEAR.
5. When you have set all the controls to the levels you require, press ENTER,
or CLEAR to clear the slider display. The status bar is updated to indicate
which controls are switched to Auto or On.
Gain Control and Sea Control
The GAIN control can be set to either Auto or Manual. In Auto mode, the
Pathfinder Plus radaroptimizesthesetting. TheSEAcontrolcanbe settoAuto-
Harbour (default), Auto-Offshore or Manual mode. In Auto-Offshore mode,
thePathfinderPlusRadaroptimizesitssettingstoaccountfortheeffectsofsea
clutter. In harbours or close proximity to land different auto settings may
be necessary to cater for the effects of land clutter. To avoid losing small
targets it is therefore advisable to set the Sea control to Auto-Harbour
mode. Alternatively, set both Sea and Gain to Manual mode then adjust
the settings to ensure that all close small targets are visible.
The GAIN control adjusts the level of the display of signals received from the
scanner; it is equivalent to a volume control on a radio.
Because the SEAcontrol affects the gain, you may need to manually readjust it
if you manually change the Gain setting.
Gain Control
When the GAIN control is set to Manual, you should check it every time you
change the range scale.
MANUAL
50%
On long range settings, the gain should be set to give a slight speckle in the
background of the radar picture. Do not set the gain too low, or you may miss
small or weak targets.
GAIN
On shorter ranges, you may wish to reduce the gain slightly to reduce the
speckle and therefore improve target definition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-9
Sea Clutter Control
Radarreturnsfromwavesaroundyourvesselcanclutterthecentreoftheradar
picture (see Figure 3-7, making it difficult to detect real targets. Such sea
clutter usually appears as multiple echoes on the display at short range scales,
andtheechoesarenotrepetitiveorconsistentinposition. Withhighwindsand
extreme conditions, echoes from sea clutter may cause dense background
clutter in the shape of an almost solid disc.
MANUAL
75%
SEA
D3968-1
Figure 3-7: Sea Clutter
The SEA control reduces the gain level in the areas near your vessel, extending
upto3to5nmdependingonthewaveandseaconditions. Thishastheeffectof
reducing the sea returns to intermittent small dots, while small targets are still
visible. Gain levels further from your vessel remain unchanged.
Youcanusethe Gain and Seacontroltohelpminimizetheeffects of sidelobes
(see Identifying False Echo Returns on page 3-5).
Note: On short range scales, do not set the Sea control so high that all clutter
is removed, since this could stop you seeing echoes from close targets.
Tuning the Receiver
The TUNE control is used to fine tune the receiver in the scanner for maximum
targetreturnson thedisplay. InAutomode, theradartunesitselfautomatically
onallrange scales. We recommend that you leave the TUNEcontrol in Auto
mode.
A
U
T
O
TUNE
If you do set the TUNE control to Manual, you will need to adjust it about 10
minutes after you have turned on the radar, since the required setting changes
once the magnetron has warmed up.
You should adjust the control to obtain the maximum signal strength, as
indicated in the 8-step bar above the slider. If you cannot tune the radar
successfully, refer to Section 7.6 for information on the Tune Preset function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Rain Clutter Control, using RAIN and FTC
Theradar can seeechoes fromrain orsnow. Returnsfromstorm areasand rain
squalls consist of countless small echoes that continuously change size,
intensity, and position. These returns, shown inFigure 3-8, sometimes appear
as large hazy areas, depending on the intensity of the rainfall or snow in the
storm cell.
The RAIN and FTC controls are used to reduce this clutter, so that targets
masked by the clutter can be seen on the radar picture.
O
F
F
• The RAIN control is used to reduce large clutter masses around your vessel
caused by rain or snow.
RAIN
• The FTC (Fast Time Constant) control is used to reduce rain clutter at a dis-
tance from your vessel, such as that shown below.
D3967-1
Figure 3-8: Rain Clutter
When the FTC control is turned up, only the leading edge of large (rain clutter)
echoes is displayed, while the effect on smaller (ship) echoes is only slight.
This means that you can also use the control on shorter ranges to distinguish
between two very close echoes on the same bearing, which may otherwise
merge and appear as one echo.
O
F
F
FTC
When the FTC control is turned up, the receiver is less sensitive, and there is a
reduction of background noise and fill-in returns from land and large targets.
You should therefore turn the control down when its use is not required. Since
storm cells are usually visible for long distances due to their extreme altitude,
you may wish to leave them displayed so that you can observe the location of
bad weather.
If you turn the RAIN or FTC control Off (equivalent to setting the level to 0%),
the actual setting is stored, and restored when you turn the control on again.
Note: RAIN and FTC are reset to Off at power-on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-11
Changing the Targets Display
The Pathfinder PLUS Radar allows you to improve target visibility by
changing the following:
• Interference rejection
• Target expansion
• Target wakes
These parameters are accessed from the default soft key TARGETS.
This section explains how to change these modes and describes the effect of
each mode. The current settings are shown at the right-hand end of the status
bar as shown in Figure 3-9.
Status Bar
Wakes on
Target Expansion on
AUTO WKS EX GZ
GST FTC RC IR
TM TV3
H-UP
RR
1/2
3nm
126°T
Interference Rejection on
D3986-3
Figure 3-9: Status Bar
➤ To change the settings of the target modes:
1. Press the TARGETS default soft key.
The target option soft keys are displayed, with the current selections high-
lighted.
TARGETS
INT REJ EXPANSION
WAKES
OFF ON OFF 1 2 OFF S M L
CLEAR
WAKES
2. Press the appropriate soft key to toggle the requiredDs36e42t-3ting between OFF
and ON.
Note: If an option is not available for the current setting, its soft key label is
grey. When you press the key, the system beeps and the setting remains OFF.
WAKES
OFF S M L
For the Wakes mode, press the WAKES soft key to step the highlighted
selection through the wake options.
You can use the soft keys to change the settings of any or all the modes on
this display.
3. When the required options are highlighted, press ENTER. The screen
returns to thedefaultdisplay with the new mode(s) in operation. The status
bar is updated to indicate which controls are switched on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Interference Rejection
Mutual radar interference is likely when two or more radar-equipped vessels
are operating within range of each other. This usually appears as a series of
small dots moving to and from the display center in a straight line or a long,
sweeping curve. This type of interference is most noticeable at long ranges.
INT REJ
OFF ON
D1639-1
Figure 3-10: Interference Rejection
The Pathfinder Plus Radar includes a mechanism that automatically reduces
such interference. This mechanism is normally left switched on. However, if
you wish to detect the presence of other radars in the vicinity, you can turn off
the interference rejection.
Target Expansion
You can make targets easier to see by expanding them. Target expansion uses
a combination of signal processing techniques and pulse length override to
increasethe sizeof targets seen on the screen. However, this may compromise
range resolution. Two levels of target expansion are available, with level 2
providing greater expansion than level 1.
EXPANSION
OFF 1 2
Target Wakes
You can see the direction and speed with which targets are moving relative to
your vessel by selecting the target wakes display option.
When wakes are switched on, the target is displayed at the brightest level and
the previous positions of targets are retained at successively fainter levels on
the screen. You can select long, medium or short wakes, which retain
information from previous scans at a reduced video level.
WAKES
OFF S M L
You can clear existing wakes from the display by pressing the CLEAR WAKES
soft key. The soft key is only available when wakes are switched on; the
display starts showing new wakes as soon as the old wakes have been cleared.
CLEAR
WAKES
Whenwakesareswitched off, no new wakesaredisplayedandexistingwakes
are cleared.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-13
3.4 Measuring Range and Bearing Using VRM/EBLs
The Pathfinder Plus Radar display allows you to specify up to two Electronic
Bearing Lines (EBLs), each with an associated Variable Range Marker
(VRM), using the VRM/EBL key.
A standard VRM is displayed as a circle with its centre on your vessel’s
position, and it’s EBL is displayed as a line from the origin to the edge of the
radar picture display. However, each pair can be floated, so that the origin can
be moved.
RR
OFF
AUTO
T
3nm
126°T
H-UP
IR
Floated VRM2
(long-dashed line)
Floated EBL2
(long-dashed line)
VRM
VRM1 (short-dashed line)
EBL1 (short-dashed line)
VRM/EBL data boxes
VRM/EBL 2
BRG 015°
RNG 096nm
T
CURSOR
CURSOR
VRM/EBL 1
BRG
50°47^72N
BRG 146°
RNG 1.70nm
T
243°
RNG 0.98nm
T
001°10^58N
Two cursor readout boxes
D3974-1
Figure 3-11: EBL and VRM Displays
Note: When using VRM/EBLs, you may wish to turn off the range rings to
make the VRMs clearer (see Section 2.4).
VRMs move if you change the range scale, so that the actual range you have
marked is maintained. VRM/EBLs also move if you offset the centre.
When a VRM/EBL pair is active, its bearing and range are displayed in its
associated data box, which can be moved, deleted or reinstated.
The bearing information is displayed as either the bearing relative to your
vessel’s heading or (if heading data is available from a position fixer or
compass) the actual bearing in degrees magnetic or degrees true. These are
controlled by the setup parameters (see Section 7.4).
The VRM/EBL functions allow you to perform the following tasks:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
• Measure the range of a target or point from your vessel’s position, using a
VRM
• Measure the bearing of a target or point from your vessel’s position, using
an EBL
• Measure the range and bearing between any two points on the radar, using
the FLOAT function
Note: An alternative method ofmeasuring range and bearing is to usethe cur-
sor data box: If the cursor readout is set to display range and bearing (rather
than Lat/Long), you can determine the range and bearing by moving the cur-
sor over the target and checking the cursor data box readings. You can also
estimate the range to a target by reference to the range rings.
Measuring Range and Bearing to Target from Vessel
To measure the range and/or bearing of a target or point from your vessel’s
position, you need to place a VRM/EBL and move it so that it crosses the
target or point for which you require the bearing or range.
When you turn on a VRM/EBL, it is displayed in its last-used position.
Note: If the VRM’s last-used position is outside the radar picture at the cur-
rent range setting, it is placed at its default position instead. This is one third
of the range for VRM1, and two-thirds for VRM2.
Placing a VRM/EBL
Placing and positioning VRM/EBLs on the Pathfinder Plus Radar display is
quick and easy.
• If a VRM/EBL is not already displayed, you can place one with a single
VRM/EBL
press of the VRM/EBL key.
• If you have already placed a VRM/EBL, pressing the VRM/EBL key pro-
vides soft key control of additional functions.
➤ To place a VRM/EBL when one is not already displayed:
1. Press VRM/EBL.
VRM/EBL
The radar picture shows VRM/EBL1, together with its associated data
box in its last-used position.
As shown in Figure 3-12, the cursor is positioned over the intersection of
the VRM circle and the EBL line. It has control of the VRM/EBL as indi-
cated by the four-way arrow, the solid VRM/EBL line, and the text VRM/
EBL.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-15
Ship's Heading Marker
EBL as solid line
Cursor symbol
as four-way arrow
Indicate cursor control
of VRM/EBL
Cursor text in
inverse video
VRM/EBL
VRM as solid line
D3970-1
Figure 3-12: Placing a VRM
2. If required, use the trackpad controls to change the radius (range) of the
VRM circle and the angle of the EBL until they cross the required target.
The range and bearing information in the VRM/EBL data box is updated
as you move the cursor.
3. Press ENTER to drop the VRM/EBL. The radar shows this
VRM/EBL as a short-dashed line, and the cursor returns to normal control.
4. Read the range and bearing to the target or point, which is shown in the
VRM/EBL data box.
5. If required, you can move or delete the VRM/EBL data box using the con-
text-sensitive cursor.
➤ To place a VRM/EBL when one is already displayed:
1. Press VRM/EBL to display the VRM/EBL soft keys.
VRM/EBL
DATABOX
OFF ON
VRM/EBL
VRM/EBL1 VRM/EBL2
OFF ON OFF ON
FLOAT¬
D3645-2
The labels for the two left-hand soft keys indicate the current status of the
two VRM/EBLs.
2. Press the soft key forthe VRM/EBL you require, to toggle the setting from
VRM/EBL1
OFF ON
OFF to ON.
The soft key labels are cleared, and the radar picture shows the VRM/EBL
and its associated data box.
3. Position the EBL/VRM using the trackpad, and press ENTER to drop it.
The radar shows the VRM/EBL as a short-dashed line (VRM/EBL1) or a
long-dashed line (VRM/EBL2), and the cursor returns to normal control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Moving an Existing VRM/EBL
You can move an existing VRM/EBL using the context-sensitive cursor. You
can control the VRM and EBL separately or both together.
you wish to change the VRM and EBL together, move the cursor over the
intersection of VRM/EBL. The label indicates the current object as VRM, EBL,
or VRM/EBL. See Moving and deleting items with the context-sensitive cursor
on page 1-17.
VRM
Deleting an Existing VRM/EBL
VRM/EBL
➤ You can delete a VRM/EBL by using the VRM/EBL key to display the soft
to OFF.
VRM/EBL1
OFF ON
➤ Alternatively, you can delete an existing VRM/EBL using the context-
sensitive cursor as described in Moving and deleting items with the context-
sensitive cursor on page 1-17
VRM
This has the same effect as turning the VRM/EBL off using the
VRM/EBL softkeys. ItturnsofftheVRM/EBLpair, irrespectiveofthecursor
text: you cannot turn off VRMs and EBLs independently.
Measuring Range and Bearing Between Targets (FLOAT)
You can measure the range and bearing between any two points on the radar,
such as two targets, using the Pathfinder Plus Radar’s Float function. This
allows you to move the origin of a VRM/EBL away from your vessel’s
position and onto a target. You can then change the angle of the EBL, relative
to its new origin, to obtain the bearing between two points. The radius of the
VRM can also be adjusted to determine the distance between two points.
Floating a VRM/EBL
Note: You can float a VRM/EBL pair using either the soft keys or the context-
sensitive cursor. The procedure for using the cursor is the same as for moving
or unfloating a VRM/EBL pair, as described below; however, as it is more dif-
ficult to locate the VRM/EBL origin when it is over the center, you will proba-
bly find it easier to use the keys in this case.
➤ To float a VRM/EBL pair using the keys:
1. Ifoneisnotalready present, placeaVRM/EBL pairasdescribed inthepre-
vious section.
2. Press VRM/EBL to display the VRM/EBL soft keys.
3. Press the FLOAT soft key. The soft keys are updated, with the relevant
options displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-17
FLOAT...
FLOAT 1
FLOAT 2 UNFLOAT 1 UNFLOAT 2
D3646-2
4. Press the FLOAT 1 soft key to float VRM/EBL1, or the FLOAT 2 soft key to
FLOAT 1
float VRM/EBL2.
The soft keys are cleared. The cursor is positioned over the origin of the
VRM/EBL, over your vessel. The cursor has control of the VRM/EBL, as
indicated by the four-headed arrow, the text FLT in inverse video, and the
solid VRM/EBL line.
5. Use the trackpad to move the origin of the VRM/EBL to the required posi-
tion (over the first target).
6. Press ENTER to drop the VRM/EBL in its new position, or CLEAR to aban-
don the operation and return the VRM/EBL to its previous position.
The radar shows the VRM/EBL as a short-dashed line (VRM/EBL1) or a
long-dashed line (VRM/EBL2), and the cursor returns to normal control.
7. Usethecontext-sensitivecursortotakecontroloftheVRMand/orEBL, to
obtain the range and/or bearing to a second target, as previously described.
VRM
8. Read the range and bearing information from the VRM/EBL data box.
Moving and Unfloating a Floating EBL
You can move or unfloat a VRM/EBL that has been floated. You can unfloat a
VRM/EBL either by using the context-sensitive cursor or by using the FLOAT
soft key options.
➤ To move or unfloat a floating VRM/EBL using the cursor:
1. MovethecursorovertheoriginoftheVRM/EBLyouwishtocontrol,until
the letters FLT are displayed.
FLT
2. If you wish to unfloat the VRM/EBL, press CLEAR. The origin of the
VRM/EBL is reset to your vessel’s position.
3. Alternatively, if you wish to move the floating VRM/EBL, press ENTERto
take control of it and move it using the trackpad.
Press ENTER again to drop the VRM/EBL in its new position, or CLEAR
to abandon the operation and return the VRM/EBL to its previous posi-
tion.
➤ To unfloat a floating VRM/EBL using the keys:
VRM/EBL
1. Press VRM/EBL to display the VRM/EBL soft keys.
2. Press the FLOAT soft key.
FLOAT 1
3. Pressthe UNFLOAT1softkeytounfloatVRM/EBL1, ortheUNFLOAT2soft
key to unfloat VRM/EBL2.
UNFLOAT 1
The soft keys are cleared, and the VRM/EBL is repositioned with its ori-
gin at your vessel’s position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Controlling VRM/EBL Data Boxes
Each VRM/EBL data box is switched on and off with its associated VRM/
EBL. However, when one or both VRM/EBLs are active, you can move the
data box(es) and you can switch the data box(es) off at any time.
➤ You use the context sensitive cursor to select and move a VRM/EBL data box
(the label BOX appears under the cursor). See Moving and deleting items with
the context-sensitive cursor on page 1-17.
BOX
➤ To control the VRM/EBL data boxes:
VRM/EBL
1. Press VRM/EBL to display the VRM/EBL soft keys.
VRM/EBL
DATABOX
OFF ON
from ON to OFF.
Note: VRM/EBL data boxes are not affected by the setting of the DATABOXES
soft key accessed using the SCREEN default soft key. This only controls the set
of data boxes available for integrated systems (see Chapter 2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-19
The Pathfinder Plus Radar display allows you to set up one or two guard
zones, using the ALARMS key. You can set up sector zones or 360° (circular)
zones as shown in Figure 3-13.
Note: You can only view and control guard zones if you are using the Master
display (that is, the display to which the scanner is connected).
RR
1/2
AUTO
T
3nm
126°T
H-UP
IR
GRD
Guard zone 1, sector zone
(short-dashed line)
Guard zone 2, circular zone
(long-dashed line)
CURSOR
BRG 031° R
RNG 2.24nm
D3975-1
Figure 3-13: Guard Zone Display
Guard zones are fixed with respect to the ship’s heading marker (SHM),
moving as the SHM moves. They also move if you offset the center, or if you
change the range scale, so that the area you have marked is maintained.
The guard alarm sounds when a target enters a guard zone, exceeding the
target density threshold within the zone; the alarm also sounds on a repeater
display. The alarm sensitivity control allows you to set the threshold above
which a new target will trigger an alarm, and also to turn the alarm on or off.
Note: A guard zone only operates when the whole zone is displayed on the
screen, or could be displayed by offsetting the center. In addition, a guard
zone is inactive for 10 seconds after it is placed or re-sized, to avoid inappro-
priate alarms during positioning.
This section covers the following topics:
• Placing a guard zone
• Moving, reshaping or deleting a guard zone
• Controlling guard zone alarms
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Placing a Guard Zone
Placing and positioning guard zones on the Pathfinder Plus Radar display is
quick and easy.
• If a guard zone is not already displayed, you can place one using the
ALARMS key.
• If you havealready placed a guard zone, pressing the ALARMS key allows
you to toggle either guard zone on or off.
Note: When you turn on a guard zone, it is normally displayed in its last-used
position and shape. However, ifthis position is off-screen atthe current range
setting, or within one quarter of the current range from your vessel, the guard
zone is placed at its default position and shape instead. This is at one third
(Zone 1) or two thirds (Zone 2) of the current range, as a sector zone occupy-
ing 30° either side of the ship’s heading marker.
➤ To place a guard zone:
1. Press ALARMS. The soft keys are displayed.
GUARD 1
OFF ON
GUARD 2
OFF ON
ALARMS
D3791-2
The soft keys indicate the current status of the two guard zones.
2. If necessary, press the soft key for the guard zone you require, to toggle the
setting between OFF and ON. The soft keys are cleared. If you turned a
guardzoneon, itisdisplayedinitslast-usedpositionwithonecornerunder
cursor control.
GUARD 1
OFF ON
The radar picture shows the guard zone as a four-sided shape bounded by
a solid line (or a circle if previously set as one).
The cursor is positioned over an outer corner of the zone as shown in
Figure 3-14. The cursor has control of this corner, as shown by the text
GRD in inverse video, the four-headed arrow, and the solid guard zone
boundary.
Sector Zone
Circular Zone
Ship's Heading Marker
Cursor symbol as
four-way arrow
Cursor text in
inverse video
Move
cursor
GRD
GRD
Zone as solid line
Indicate cursor control
of guard zone
D3971-1
Figure 3-14: Placing a Guard Zone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-21
3. If necessary, use the trackpad to move the corner of the guard zone to the
required position. As you move the corner, the width and/or height of the
zone changes, but its general sector shape is retained.
Note: To create a 360° guard zone, rather than a sector guard zone, you can
either move the corner all the way round to form a circle, or move it back to
just the other side of the other outer corner.
4. Press ENTER to drop the corner in its new position and redraw the zone, or
CLEAR to abandon the operation and return the corner to its previous posi-
tion.
The display shows this zone boundary as a short-dashed line (zone 1) or a
long dashed line (zone 2), and the cursor returns to normal control.
5. If required, use the context-sensitive cursor to reposition other corners/
sides of the zone in turn, as described below.
Moving, Reshaping or Deleting a Guard Zone
You can move, reshape or delete an existing guard zone using the context-
sensitive cursor.
➤ You use the context sensitive cursor to reshape a guard zone by placing the
GRD
cursor over thecorner or side that you wish to control (the label GRD appears
under the cursor). See Moving and deleting items with the context-sensitive
cursor on page 1-17.
Note: To convert a 360° guard zone back to a sector guard zone, take control
of any point on the circle, and move it to open up the circle.
➤ You can use the context sensitive cursor to delete a guard zone.
➤ You can also delete (turn off) a zone by pressing the ALARMS key, and then
pressing the appropriate guard zone soft key to toggle the setting from ON to
ALARM
OFF ON
OFF.
Controlling Guard Zone Alarms
The guard alarm is triggered when a target enters a guard zone which exceeds
the target density threshold. You can set the threshold above which a new
target will trigger an alarm, and can also turn the alarm on or off.
When the alarm is triggered, the unit beeps and a text message is displayed.
➤ To clear the alarm, press any key (on the master or repeater display).
The alarm will sound again after 10 seconds, unless one or more of the
following happens:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
• You turn the guard zone off
• You adjust the guard zone size/shape to reduce the number of targets in the
zone
• You turn the alarm off
• You decrease the alarm sensitivity
• The target leaves the guard zone
➤ To change the alarm sensitivity setting:
1. Press MULTI to display the sliders.
ON
O
F
F
A
U
T
O
25%
50%
ALARM
LIGHT
CONTRAST
TUNE
D3935-3
2. Press the ALARM soft key to highlight the Alarm slider.
3. If required, press the soft key again to toggle the setting between OFF and
ON. You can only move the slider if the control is set to ON.
4. Use the trackpad to increase or decrease the alarm slider setting. You can
press and hold the trackpad to change the value more rapidly.
5. The higher the setting, the more sensitive the alarm, and the smaller the tar-
get density required to set it off.
6. Press ENTER to clear the slider display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-23
3.6 MARPA
Introduction to MARPA
The hsb2 series displays include a MARPA (Mini Automatic Radar Plotting
Aid) function for target tracking and risk analysis. This section gives an
introductiontothePathfinderPlusRadarMARPAsystemandshowsyouhow
to use the MARPA functions, you should also read Section 7.5.
MARPA improves the standard of collision avoidance by obtaining detailed
information for several automatically tracked targets. MARPA provides
continuous, accurate and rapid situation evaluation.
You can acquire up to ten targets, which are then automatically tracked by the
MARPA system. MARPA calculates target bearing and range, true speed and
course, CPA(ClosestPointofApproach), andTCPA(TimetoClosestPointof
Approach).
Each tracked target can be displayed with a vector depicting approximate
target speed (vector length) and course (vector direction). The calculated
targetdatacanalsobeshownonthescreen. Eachtargetiscontinuallyassessed
and you are warned if one becomes dangerous or is lost.
Effective MARPA operation is dependent on accurate own ship’s heading,
only relative vector, CPA and TCPA are shown; target course and speed
cannot be calculated). For more information on heading sensors, and how to
connect themto your display, refer to Heading and Position Data on page 1-9
and Appendix E.
SAFETY NOTICES
MARPA can improve collision avoidance when used wisely. It is the
user’s responsibility to exercise common prudence and navigational
judgements.
There are conditions where acquiring a target may become difficult. These
same conditions may be a factor in successfully tracking a target. Some of
the conditions are:
• The target echo is weak.
• The target is very close to land, buoys or other large targets.
• The target or your own ship is making rapid manoeuvres.
• Choppy sea state conditions exist and the target is buried in excessive
sea clutter or in deep swells.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
• Choppy sea state conditions exist yielding poor stability; own ship’s
heading data is very unstable.
• Inadequate heading data
Symptoms of such conditions are that acquisition is difficult and the
MARPA vectors are unstable; the symbol wanders away from the target,
locks onto another target or changes to a lost target symbol. If any of these
conditionsarepresent, acquisition and trackingmay need to be re-initiated
or, in some cases be impossible to maintain. Improving the quality of the
heading data will reduce the effect of the other conditions.
Risk Assessment
Each target is monitored to see if it will be within a certain distance from your
own vessel within a certain time. If so, the target is designated as dangerous
and you are warned with an audible alarm in addition to a warning on the
screen. Thetarget symbol changes and flashes to indicatethatitis a dangerous
target. Pressing any key silences the alarm and removes the warning, but the
target symbol remains dangerous.
Both the distance (Own Vessel Safe Zone) and the time (Time to Safe Zone)
are selectable as described in Section 7.5.
If a target is lost, either because the MARPA software has lost contact with it,
or because it has moved out of range, you are warned, again with an audible
alarmandanon-screenwarning.Pressinganykeysilencesthealarm, removes
the warning and removes the lost target symbol from the screen.
Target Data
All MARPA targets are stored in a MARPA database list, which shows
bearing, range, course and speed of each tracked target.
For any one target a pop-up data box can be placed on the screen, this shows
bearing, range, course, speed, CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA
(Time to Closest Point of Approach). The target for which data is displayed is
indicated by a circle around its symbol.
Each target is displayed as a symbol to indicate its status:
Target is being acquired
Target is safe
Target is dangerous.
Target is Lost
The dangerous and lost symbols are shown flashing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-25
Target Vector and History
The MARPA targets can be displayed with a vector line showing where they
will be at a certain time in the future, (assuming present course and speed).
You can select a relative or true vector and the vector length. The vector type
(RV or TV) and length are shown in the status bar.
You can also select to view the target’s history, this appears as a series of dots
that are dropped by the target as it makes way. The interval between them is
selectable.
A relative vector indicates the target’s motion related to your own ship’s
motion. The target’s relative course and speed are calculated to produce a
vector that is displayed on the target only. This mode is used for collision
avoidance and threat assessment.
A true vector indicates the target’s motion over ground. In this mode true
vectors for the target and your own ship are displayed. MARPA measures the
direction in which the target and own ship are actually moving over the
ground. The result is the vessel’s true course, the rate of motion is the vessel’s
true speed. Consider this motion as if you were in a helicopter looking down
watching the targets move across the water. This mode can aid navigation.
Section 7.5 describes how to set the target vector and history parameters.
Repeater Displays
Onanintegratedhsb2 displaysystemtherepeaterdisplay(withtheappropriate
software version) can access the MARPA functions, and targets are shown on
the repeater display.MARPA data is also sent on NMEA allowing any other
equipment, with the necessary functionality, to show the tracked targets’ data.
Radar Range Scales
MARPA target acquisition is only available at radar range scales of up to
12nm, although tracking continues at all ranges.
Note: If you change to a lower range scale, targets may be beyond the range
of the scanner and will be lost. In such cases an alarm pop-up indicates the
target is off-screen.
Using MARPA
some options are available with the context sensitive cursor, or through the
MARPA database list. Where there are two ways of performing a certain
function this section describes both ways. Information on how to set up the
MARPA system is in Section 7.5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
HDG MODE TARGETS
SCREEN
MARPA
D4126_1
Acquire a Target
➤ To acquire a target:
1. Press the MARPA soft key to display the ACQUIRE TARGET soft keys.
CANCEL
TARGET
MARPA BOX ACQUIRE
OFF ON
TARGET
MARPA
LIST
D4120_1
2. Position the cursor over the required target and press the ACQUIRE TARGET
ACQUIRE
TARGET
soft key.
The
target at the cursor position. If a target is present for several scans the radar
locks onto it and the symbol indicates a safe target, the target vector is
symbol is placed at the cursor position and the radar searches for a
also displayed. If the target is continuously lost, the lost targetsymbol is
displayed and a Lost Target alarm is generated; press any key to cancel the
alarm and remove the lost target symbol from the display.
3. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default display.
Cancel a Target
➤ To cancel a target using the context-sensitive cursor:
1. Move the cursor over the target, the following soft keys are displayed.
CANCEL
TARGET
MARPA BOX
OFF ON
D4119_1
2. PresstheCANCEL TARGET softkeytocanceltargettrackingandremove the
CANCEL
TARGET
symbol from the display. The default soft keys are displayed.
➤ To cancel a target from the database list.
1. Press the default soft key MARPA to display the MARPA soft keys.
2. Press the MARPA LIST soft key, the database list is displayed.
MARPA
LIST
3. Use the trackpad to select a target, then press the CANCEL TARGET soft key
CANCEL
TARGET
to remove the selected target.
4. Press CLEAR to remove the database list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Standard Radar Operations
3-27
View Target Data
YoucantoggletheMARPAdataboxon/offusingtheMARPA BOXON/OFF soft
key. This box displays the data for one MARPA target. You can select the
target using the context sensitive cursor or the database list. Alternatively, if
you display the data box when no target is selected, data is displayed for the
last target that had the data box displayed – unless a new target has been
acquired, then the new target data is displayed.
➤ To view (or hide) target data using the cursor:
1. Move the cursor over the target for which you require data. The letters
MARPA and the following soft keys are displayed.
CANCEL
TARGET
MARPA BOX
OFF ON
D4119_1
2. Press the MARPA BOX ON/OFF soft key to toggle the data box on/off for the
selected target.The target data box is displayed and the associated target
symbol is identified by a circle drawn around it.
MARPA BOX
OFF ON
The default soft keys are displayed when you move the cursor away from
the target.
Note: When you select ON, if the data box was already displayed for another
target, it is updated for the selected target.
MARPA 1
BRG 84°M RNG 1.48nm
CRS 110°M SPD 0.0kts
CPA 1.48nm TCPA PASSED
D4117_1
Figure 3-15: MARPA Target Data Box
➤ To view (or hide) target data using the default soft keys:
1. Press MARPA to display the MARPA soft keys.
2. Press the MARPA BOX ON/OFF soft key to toggle the data box on. The target
data box is displayed and the associated target symbol is identified by a cir-
cle drawn around it. The default soft keys are displayed.
MARPA BOX
OFF ON
3. Press the MARPA BOX ON/OFF soft key again to toggle the data box off.
➤ To view the MARPA database list and a target data box:
MARPA
LIST
1. Press MARPA followed by the MARPA LIST soft key, the database list is dis-
played.
2. Use the trackpad to select a target, then press the MARPA BOX ON/OFF soft
MARPA BOX
OFF ON
key to toggle the data box on/off.
3. Press CLEAR to remove the database list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
MARPA
RANGE COURSE SPEED
ID BRG
0 327oT 0.63nm 256oT
1 537oT 1.70nm 256oT
3.0kts
2.0kts
CANCEL
TARGET
MARPA BOX
OFF ON
CANCEL
ALL
D4121-1
Figure 3-16: MARPA Database List
➤ To cancel all targets:
MARPA BOX
OFF ON
1. Press MARPA followed by MARPA LIST to display the database list.
2. Press the CANCEL ALL soft key. You are prompted to confirm.
Press YES to continue, all the MARPA targets are cleared from the screen,
and the data is removed from the MARPA database list.
Press NO to cancel the operation.
CANCEL
ALL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Integrated Radar Operations
4-1
Chapter 4: Integrated Radar Operations
4.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to use and display non-radar information that may
beavailablefromotherunitsconnected to your system. Italsoexplains howto
use the man overboard (MOB) function.You can use this chapter with the
radar display set to simulator mode, or on the water after you have installed
and set up your Pathfinder Radar system.
In order to use these functions, you need the following additional data from
equipment connected to your system via a SeaTalk , NMEA or hsb2 link:
Table 4-1:
Function of External Data
Data
Example source Integrated functions available
Heading
Compass*
Autopilot
- Heading value in status bar
- North Up or Course Up heading modes (as
alternatives to Head Up
Rate Gyro Com-
pass on NMEA
- MARPA
*If heading data is available via both NMEA and SeaTalk, NMEA data takes priority. For all other
data, SeaTalk data takes priority (see Section 8.8).
Waypoint data
Position
Chartplotter
GPS system
- Waypoint display and data
- Marks
- Position data in Data Box and Nav Window
- MOB
- COG, SOG and time
Other data
Transducers
- Data Box and Nav Window data displays including
speed, depth, wind
Chart display
Chartplotter, either - Chart display as full-screen or half-window display
combined or via
hsb2 connection
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Changing the heading mode of the radar picture
• Using marks
• Man Overboard (MOB)
• Cursor echo
Note:Untilyouarefamiliarwithinterpretingtheradardisplay,youshouldtake
every opportunity to compare the radar’s display patterns with visual targets,
such as other vessels, buoys and coastal structures. You should practice har-
bour and coastal navigation during daylight and in clear weather conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
4.2 Changing the Heading Mode
The radar picture is normally shown with your vessel’s dead ahead bearing
straight up, as indicated by the Ship’s Heading Marker at 0° relative bearing.
This is the Head Up orientation.
If heading information is available via a SeaTalk or NMEA connection, you
can choose a different heading mode. In Course Up and North Up mode you
can also select relative or true motion.
True and Relative Motion
Relative motion is the default for the radar display. In relative motion your
own ship’s position remains fixed on the radar screen and all radar targets
move relative to your own ship.
In true motion, fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the screen,
whilst your own ship moves across the radar image at the appropriate speed
and heading. A map-like image is thus displayed, with all moving vessels
travelling in true perspective to each other and to fixed land masses.
As your ship’s position approaches the edge of the screen, the radar display is
automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of your ship. You can manually
reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing the TRUE REL soft key twice.
Heading Modes
The heading modes are as follows:
North Up
Course Up
Head Up
D3988-1
Figure 4-1: Radar Heading Modes
• Head Up: The radar picture is displayed with the vessel’s current heading
upwards. As the heading changes the picture will rotate.
• North Up: The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with north
upwards. As you change heading, the ship’s heading marker moves.
• Course Up: The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the cur-
rently selected course upwards. Asyou changeheading, the ship’sheading
marker moves. If you select a new course, the picture resets to display the
new course upwards.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Integrated Radar Operations
4-3
The reference used for the Course Up depends on the information available.
The first available in the following list is used:
1. A locked heading (i.e. the heading being used by an autopilot) over a
SeaTalk connection
2. The heading at the time Course Up was selected
If 1. is in use and a new course (locked heading) is selected, the picture
automatically rotates to the new Course Up.
If 2. is in use, press the HDG MODE soft key then COURSE UP to manually reset
the Course Up to the new course.
Selecting the Heading and Motion Mode
Press the HDG MODE default soft key to obtain the following display, when
heading information is available:
HDG MODE
TRUE REL
NORTH UP COURSE UP HEAD UP
D3641-3
The currently selected mode is highlighted, and is indicated in the radar status
bar (N-UP, C-UP or H-UP and TM or RM).
➤ To change the heading and motion mode:
1. Press the HDG MODE default soft key.
2. Pressthesoftkeycorrespondingtothemodeyourequire. Theradarpicture
changes to the selected mode.
3. Press ENTER to clear the heading mode soft keys. The current orientation
is indicated in the status bar.
Note: True Motion is only available in Course Up and North up mode.
If you re-select Course Up when this is already the current mode, the Course
Up reference is reassessed according to the current data.
Effect on VRM/EBLs
VRM/EBLsdonotmoveonthescreen,unlessyouchangetherange, offsetthe
centre, or change the heading mode.
• In Head Up mode, the VRM/EBLs are fixed with respect to the ship’s
heading marker.
• In North Up mode, the VRM/EBLs are fixed with respect to North.
• In Course Up mode, the VRM/EBLs are fixed with respect to the selected
course.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
4.3 Using Marks
The Marks function allows you to place a mark anywhereon the radarpicture.
You can also move existing marks or delete them. You should be aware that
radar marks are not the same as chart waypoints and cannot be used in routes,
nor can they be transferred to other displays.
Marks are placed with the default mark symbol
at either cursor or vessel
position. If you wish to use a different symbol, you can change the default
setting from the RADAR SET UP menu (see Section 7.4). Mark symbols are
always displayed within a circle.
Marks are stored with their latitude, longitude and symbol; the information is
retained when the radar is turned off. Up to 100 marks can be stored in each
display unit.
Note: When you use the MARKS key to access the Marks function, simply
press the key momentarily and release it. If you hold it down for two seconds,
the Pathfinder Radar will enter man overboard (MOB) mode, as described in
Section 4.4.
MARKS
TheMarksfunctionisonlyavailablewhen yourvessel’spositionisknownvia
the SeaTalk or NMEA connection.
Placing a Mark
➤ To place a mark symbol:
1. Press the MARKS key. The soft keys PLACE MRK AT CURSOR and PLACE
MARKS
MRK AT VESSEL are displayed.
2. To place a mark at the cursor, position the cursor at the required point. If
you are displaying the cursor position box showing the lat/long position,
you can check the coordinates to place the mark accurately.
Press the PLACE MARK AT CURSOR softkey.The mark is placed using the
default symbol.
PLACE MRK
AT CURSOR
PLACE MRK
AT VESSEL
3. To place a mark at the vessel position, press PLACE MRK AT VESSEL. The
mark is placed using the default symbol.
Note: If the Mark database is full, a warning message is displayed, with the
position (in latitude and longitude) of the oldest mark. You have the following
options:
i. Press the YES soft key to replace this old mark with the new mark.
ii. Press the NO soft key to keep the old mark and display the next oldest
mark. YoucankeeppressingNOtostepthroughthemarkdatabaseuntil
a mark you wish to replace is displayed, and then press YES.
iii. Press CLEAR to keep all the existing marks, and cancel the new mark
placement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Integrated Radar Operations
4-5
Moving or Deleting a Mark
You can move or delete marks using the context-sensitive cursor.
➤ Use the context sensitive cursor to move or delete a mark (the label MRK
appears under the cursor). See Moving and deleting items with the context-
sensitive cursor on page 1-17.
MRK
4.4 Man Overboard (MOB)
If you losea personorobjectoverboard, and need to return to the location, you
should use the Man Overboard (MOB) function immediately.
Note: To obtain an MOB position, you need either of the following:
• Position data from a GPS or equivalent device
• Heading and speed data, so that the position can be calculated by dead
reckoning
You can select the type of data used for the MOB position using the Set Up
Menus (see Section 7.3).
➤ To initiate the MOB procedure, press and hold the MARKS key for two
MARKS
seconds.
The Pathfinder Plus Radar then performs all the following tasks
automatically:
• Marks the current position with a MOB
symbol.
• The MOB waypoint replaces any current active waypoint and route.
• Displays the MOB data box, showing the bearing and distance from your
vessel to the MOB waypoint position, and the elapsed time since the MOB
was initiated.
• Displays the position data box, showing your vessel’s position.
• As your vessel moves away from the MOB position, a dotted line is dis-
played connecting the MOB position and the vessel’s current position.
• Sounds a 4-second alarm pattern every 30 seconds.
• Sends an MOB message to other units in the system, via the SeaTalk con-
nection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Figure 4-2: MOB Alarm
➤ To cancel the MOB, press and hold the MARK key for 2 seconds.
MARKS
Note: The MOB procedure can also be initiated or cancelled remotely if the
appropriate SeaTalk message is received by the Pathfinder Radar.
4.5 Cursor Echo
In a combined radar/chart display, or in a system with any chart display
connectedviaSeatalk, youcansetthedisplayto enablecursor transfer. Cursor
echo(accessedfromtheSetUpMenu)enablesyoutodisplayachartcursoron
the radar picture, or a radar cursor on the chart picture (you cannot display a
remote radar cursor in a radar window, nor a remote chart cursor in a chart
window).
The following options are provided:
• Radar Cursor In : displays the cursor from another radar on the chart dis-
play or chart window (default - OFF).
• Chart Cursor In: displays the cursor from another chartplotter on the
radar display or radar window (default - OFF).
Note: The remote display must have SeaTalk Cursor Out enabled.
Raymarine recommend that in multi-display systems, you do not enable Cur-
sor Out on more than two displays. If multiple displays have cursor out en-
abled, the cursors will not be displayed simultaneously, but will flash on/off.
• SeaTalk Cursor Out: enables the output, onto SeaTalk, of the display’s
own cursor (default - OFF).
• CursorEchoLocal:echoesthecursorpositionbetweenopenwindowson
the same display (default - ON).
When the appropriate option is switched on, the display shows its own cursor,
plusthecursoroftheotherdisplay(s)withappropriatecursortext(RDRorCHT)
to indicate its origin. This means that you could move the cursor over a target
on the radar display, and check the identity of the target by looking at the radar
cursor position on the chartplotter.
Refer to Section 7.3 for cursor echo set up details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-1
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the chart functions to navigate with your
display. It covers the following topics:
• Using chart cards.
• Controlling waypoints, including placing, moving, editing and deleting
waypoints.
• Working with routes, including creating a new route, managing routes
using the route database and editing routes.
• Following routes and going to waypoints.
• Transferring Waypoints and Routes
• Usingtracks,includingshowingtracks,settinguptracks,savingtracksand
creating a route from a track (SmartRoute).
All these chart functions are available in plotter mode, so you can plot and
track routes at large scales even when a chart card is not installed.
Further functions, including measuring distances and setting alarms are
described in Chapter 6.
Safety
The chartplotter makes it very easy to place a waypoint and travel towards it.
However, you should always check first that the route is safe. If you are using
the chartplotter in combination with a SeaTalk autopilot, the autopilot will
prompt for confirmation before it steers the vessel towards the waypoint.
If you have entered your route using a small-scale chart, zoom in to a larger
scale to check for hazards, such as small shoals, that may not be shown on the
smaller scale charts.
Note: Until you are familiar with interpreting the chart display, you should
take every opportunity to compare the displayed objects with visual targets,
such as buoys and coastal structures. You should practice harbour and coast-
al navigation during daylight and in clear weather conditions.
CAUTION:
The equipment should not be used as a substitute for good navigational
practice nor for official government paper charts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
5.2 Using Chart Cards
The chartplotter has a built-in world map; most areas are displayed on a scale of
4000 nm from the top to the bottom of the screen, and can be zoomed in to
150 nm.
Tousethechartplotterasanavigationaid,chartswithdetailedinformationforthe
area you wish to navigate are required. The charts are available on C-MAP NT
electronic chart cards (C-Cards), each of which can store as many as 20 charts in
an electronic format. A single C-MAP chart normally provides as much
information as is available in paper charts for that geographic area, and can be
displayed down to a range of 1/64 nm on the screen if the data is available.
Two card slots are provided on the display unit. Chart data from both slots can
be downloaded.
The chart scale in use is indicated in the status bar - the number represents the
distance (in nautical miles) displayed from the top of the chart window to the
bottom of the chart window.
Note: You can remove and insert cards while a chart is displayed. The chart
information is retained on-screen until the chartplotter redraws the screen:
for example, when you pan outside the current area, or use the RANGE key to
change the chart scale.
Data on a chart card is also available to a repeater display, where it can be used
independently of the master; a display on hsb2 can access up to six remote
chart cartridges. When the master display is switched off chart data is retained
on the repeater screen until the chart is redrawn.
Inserting a Chart Card
➤ To insert a chart card:
1. Check that the card is a C-MAP NT C-Card with the required chart stored
on it.
2. Open the card cover, at the lower left of the display front panel.
3. Hold the card with the title label towards the left, as shown in the illustra-
tion.
4. Gently push the card into one of the two slots. It will only go in if it is cor-
rectly oriented. Push the card in as far as it will go, then move it to the right
so that the top is under the retaining pegs. The card will be held in place by
the pegs.
5. Close the card cover until it clicks shut, to prevent water entering the dis-
play unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-3
D4158-1
Figure 5-1: Removing the Chart Card
Removing a Chart Card
We recommend that before you remove a chart cartridge, you ensure the chart
is not being used on any other display unit. Removing a chart cartridge whilst
a display unit is accessing the chart may cause an operational error.
➤ To remove a chart card:
1. Open the card cover, at the lower left of the display front panel.
2. Press on the card you wish to remove, and move the top of the card to the
left to clear the retaining pegs.
The card will spring half-way out, enabling you to grip the card and
remove it from the slot.
3. Remember to close the card cover so that it clicks shut, to prevent water
from entering the card reader assembly.
Displaying the Chart Data
Thenewchartinformationwillbedisplayedwhenyoumovethecursorintoan
area covered by the new chart or, if it is already in the area, change the range
scale.
Ifanhsb2 seriesrepeaterdisplayisconnected,thechartcanalsobeaccessedby
the repeater display. To see the chart you may need to zoom or pan, to redraw
the chart area to the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
The boundary of each chart digitized in the current card is defined by a box or
rectangle. (You can switch off the chartboundaries display if you wish, as part
of the chartplotter set up described in Section 7.7.)
➤ To zoom in:
1. Usethetrackpadtomovethecursorinsideoneofthechartboxes, andpress
the lower part of the RANGE key.
That area is expanded, with the cursor at the centre, so that you can see
more detail. Note that the smaller the chart box is on the screen, the further
you can zoom in and the greater the amount of detail that is available.
RANGE
If you have switched on Plotter Mode (see Section 7.7), you can zoom in
further than the most detailed chart; all chart functions remain available.
Displaying Chart Object and Source Information
Chart cards include a number of displayed objects for which information is
available, such as lights and buoys. They also contain additional source data
for structures, lines, open sea areas etc. You can use the context-sensitive
cursor to identify (in a pop-up box) an object or chart position and you can
obtain detailed information for the selected item.
Set up options let you specify when an identification pop-up is displayed;
three options are available:
• Display a pop-up for all objects and source data automatically when the
cursor is over the object symbol or source area.
• Display a pop-up for displayed objects when the cursor is over the symbol.
• Do not display the identification pop-ups.
The chartplotter also provides information for the nearest waypoint, port
service, port, tide station, wreck or obstruction for a selected position. If your
chart includes port and tide data, this can be displayed.
➤ To identify an item and obtain detailed information:
1. Move the cursor over the symbol or chart position for which you require
the information. If specified in Chart Set Up, a pop-up box such as the fol-
lowing is displayed at the lower left or upper right corner of the screen:
1 Object
FAIRWAY BN Bn Safe Water RW
LFI.W.10s7m5M
D4260-2
2. Toview detailedinformation,pressENTER. Thedetailsavailablearelisted
on-screen in an object information pop-up.
The pop-up is spit into two windows; objects are listed in the upper win-
dow and details for the selected object are provided in the lower win-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-5
dow.Use the trackpad to select an object in the upper window and use the
soft keys to scroll up or down the detailed information in the lower win-
dow.
3. Press CLEAR to remove the pop-up from the screen and return to the
default display.
Port Area
At large chart scales port area information is indicated by the symbol . An
objectinformation pop-up provides the nameofthemarina orportanda listof
the facilities available.
Where available, details for each facility can be displayed. This information
includes items such as accommodation, slip sizes, fueling, sanitation,
electrical or other maintenance services provided, VHF channels monitored,
and other safety and navigation information.
In some areas the chart shows symbols for individual facilities. The facilities
and their associated symbols are illustrated in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2: Port Symbols
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Tide Data
The symbol
indicates tide height data is available for that position on the
chart. When you select the tide height option, a graph of predictions for
maximum and minimum tide heights is displayed, data for sunrise and sunset
is also provided as illustrated Figure 5-3.
Note: The predictions available are sufficiently accurate under moderate
weatherconditions, forthecoastalareas servedby the reference station, to be
used for navigation planning. However, certain weather fronts and storms
can alter tidal patterns and influence predicted times and heights.
The cursor, represented by a dotted vertical line on the graph, is used to select
a time for which the tide height is displayed.
You can use the soft keys and trackpad to change the date for which tide
information is shown.
CSR 50°49^05W BRG 304°T
POS 001°18^00W RNG 27.70nm
6nm
CALSHOT CASTLE
4.61
3.96
3.31
2.66
2.01
1.36
0.71
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
CURSOR
13:30
HEIGHT 4.06m
SELECTED DATE
2/01/1998
TIME
SUNRISE/SUNSET
HIGH/LOW WATER
TWILIGHT
SUNRISE
SUNSET
0646
0807
1611
1732
LOW 0640 0.88m
HIGH 0220 4.22m
LOW 1900 0.76m
HIGH 1400 4.10m
TWILIGHT
SET DATE PREV. DAY
TODAY
NEXT DAY
D4270-2
Figure 5-3: Tide Data
➤ To select a time, use the trackpad to move the cursor to the required time.
➤ To change the day press PREV. DAY, DAY or TODAY, as required. Alternatively,
pressSETDATE;tochangedate, usethetrackpadtomovethecursorleft/rightto
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-7
select the character and up/down to increase/decrease the value.
The graph and tide data will be updated accordingly.
Nearest
You can obtain information for the eight nearest waypoints, port services,
ports, tide stations, wrecks or obstructions for a selected position. The
chartplotter also provides options to redraw the chart with a selected item at
the centre, Goto a waypoint and display a list of all the port on the chart card.
➤ To obtain the information for the nearest objects:
1. Move the cursor to the required position then press ENTER to display the
object information pop-up.
2. Press the NEAREST soft key. The Find Nearest pop-up list is displayed.
Use the trackpad to highlight the required object, then press ENTER.
i. For port services the port service symbols are displayed, use the track-
pad to highlight the required service, then press ENTER.
If you select a port then press ENTER, detailed information for the ser-
vice at that port is displayed. Typical port data is shown in Figure 5-4.
D4255_1
Figure 5-4: Nearest Port - Typical Data
ii. For all other items, the eight nearestobjects are listed with distance and
bearing.
Soft keys provide you with options to EXPAND port, wreck and obstruc-
tions data; view a FULL LIST of ports detailed on the chart card; SHOW
TIDE data; GOTO a waypoint and FIND the object (redraw the chart with
the object at the centre). Use the trackpad to highlight an object, then
press the required soft key.
3. To return to the default display, press CLEAR to back-track through the
pop-up lists.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
5.3 Working with Waypoints
Introduction
The Chartplotter enables you to place up to 998 waypoints (in addition,
waypoint number 999 is used for MOB operation): a waypoint is a position
the chartplotter are stored in a waypoint database list which includes symbol,
position, bearing, range and additional data. All waypoints in the database are
displayed on the screen, unless you set waypoint display off in the Chart Set
Up menu, as described in Chapter 7. You can select a waypoint, either on-
screen or from the list, for editing.
A waypoint can be placed at the cursor position, or at the vessel’s current
position (this is sometimes known as an event mark); a waypoint at the vessel
position includes additional information (if available) on the depth and
temperature when it was placed. Alternatively, you can manually enter
Waypoints as either Lat/Long coordinates or Loran TDs which are
automatically converted into Lat/Long coordinates. All waypoints can be
included in a route. You can place waypoints, using simulator mode, before
you install the chartplotter on your vessel.
Note: Radar marks may also be displayed on the screenif your chartplotter is
a combined radar/chartplotter or is part of an integrated system; these are
screen annotations - you cannot GOTO marks, nor include them in routes.
When you place a new waypoint, it is displayed using the default symbol of a
cross (unless you have changed the symbol in Chart Set Up). The waypoint is
added to the waypoint list and tagged with the next available number. You can
use the edit functions to change the symbol and name. When the cursor is
positioned over a waypoint, the waypoint bearing and range are displayed.
Waypoints in the current route are available on other SeaTalk instruments that
ST80 Masterview. You can transfer waypoints between the chartplotter and
other NMEA or SeaTalk instruments using the Waypoint Transfer functions.
You can also save waypoints to, or load them from, a user cartridge. These
functions are described in Section 5.6.
This section explains how to perform the following tasks using the on-screen
cursor and the waypoint list:
• Placing a Waypoint
• Selecting a Waypoint
• Displaying Waypoint data
• Editing a Waypoint (symbol, name & position)
• Erasing a Waypoint
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-9
• Moving a Waypoint
At the end is a section about using the ST60/80 Navigator Keypad to select,
edit, and name your waypoints.
Placing a Waypoint
The scenario Place and Goto a Waypoint on page 2-24 provides a simple
example of how to place a waypoint.
➤ To access the place waypoint soft keys, press MARKS:
PLACE WPT PLACE WPT WAYPOINT LOAD/SAVE
MARKS
AT CURSOR AT VESSEL LIST
USER CARD
D5572-1
➤ To place a waypoint at the cursor position or at the vessel position:
PLACE WPT
AT CURSOR
1. Press either the PLACE WPT AT CURSOR or the PLACE WPT AT VESSEL soft
key. The waypoint is added to the waypoint list and tagged using the next
available number.
PLACE WPT
AT VESSEL
The waypoint soft keys are displayeduntil youmove thecursor away from
the waypoint or press CLEAR.
GOTO
WAYPOINT WAYPOINT WAYPOINT WAYPOINT
EDIT
ERASE
MOVE
D4163-1
You can use the EDIT WAYPOINT soft key to name the waypoint as
described in Editing Waypoints below.
2. Press CLEAR or ENTER to remove the place waypoint soft keys.
➤ To place a waypoint as latitude/longitude using the Waypoint List:
MARKS
1. PressMARKS, followedbytheWAYPOINTLISTsoftkey. TheWaypointList
and associated soft keys are displayed.
WAYPOINT
LIST
2. Press the MAKE NEW WAYPOINT soft key followed by the LAT/LONG soft
key;theWPT POSITION (LAT/LONG) screenisdisplayed, withit’sassociated
soft keys. The waypoint is placed at the current vessel position, or if not
available, the cursor position.
MAKE NEW
WAYPOINT
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
WAYPOINT LIST
NAME
SYMBOL
WAYPOINT 001
WAYPOINT 002
WAYPOINT 003
WAYPOINT 004
WAYPOINT 005
POSITION
50°21^966N
001°20^368W
BRG _186°
RNG _21.0nm
TEMP
DEPTH
---°C
---m
DATE
TIME
--/--/--
--:--:--
GOTO
EDIT
MAKE NEW WAYPOINT
D4262-2
3. You can use the soft keys to edit the waypoint position as described in Edit-
ing the Waypoint Details on page 5-13.
It is added to the Waypoint List and named with the next available number.
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER or CLEAR twice.
➤ To place a waypoint as Loran TDs using the Waypoint List:
1. Press MARK, followed by the WAYPOINT LIST soft key; the Waypoint List
and associated soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the MAKE NEW WAYPOINT, the waypoint is placed at the current ves-
sel position, or if not available, the cursor position. To change the position
press the LORAN TDs softkey;the WPT POSITION (LORAN TDs) screen is dis-
played, with it’s associated soft key.
Note:YoucanenterwaypointsasLoranTDswhichareconvertedtoLat/Long
coordinates. However, although the waypoint is shown in both Lat/Long and
LoranTDsintheWaypointList, youcansubsequentlyonlyeditthepositionas
Lat/Long coordinates. TD entries in the Waypoint List are shown only for
those waypoints which were entered as TDs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-11
WPT POSITION (LORAN TDs)
CHAIN
6731 - NELS Lessay
SLAVES Y - Z (24 -39)
TD 1
29138.0
44713.8
+0.0
TD 2
ASF 1
ASF 2
+0.0
CHAIN
ASF1/ASF2 SET TD 1 SET TD 2
3. Edit the Loran parameters as required, using:
i. The CHAIN soft key, which enables selection of both the Chain and it’s
Slave:
WPT POSITION (LORAN TDs)
CHAIN
6731 - NELS Lessay
SLAVES Y - Z (24 -39)
TD 1
29138.0
44713.8
+0.0
TD 2
ASF 1
ASF 2
+0.0
SELECT CHAIN
SELECT SLAVES
ii. The ASF1/ASF2 soft key, which presents two soft keys for editing ASF 1
and ASF 2 parameters independently:
SET ASF 1 SET ASF 2
iii. TheSET TD 1 and SET TD 2 soft keys,whichenableediting of eachTD’s
parameters independently.
Note: Except for the CHAIN setting, parameters are edited using the trackpad
as described in Editing the Waypoint Details on page 5-13.
4. When editing is complete, press the ENTER key to save the waypoint or
CLEAR to cancel the operation; the display returns to the New Waypoint
screen.
Press the ENTER or CLEAR to return to the Waypoint List.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Selecting a Waypoint
Positioning the cursor over a waypoint selects that waypoint and accesses the
waypointsoftkeys. ThesekeysenableyoutoGOTO (describedinSection 5.5),
EDIT (symbol, name, position), ERASE or MOVE the waypoint.
Selecting a waypoint from the List allows you to GOTO and EDIT (symbol,
name, position, erase) the waypoint. The Waypoint List also provides options
to make a new waypoint and transfer waypoints.
➤ To select a waypoint using the cursor:
1. Move the cursor over the waypoint, until the letters WPT are displayed.
TheWaypointDatabox(seeWaypointDataDisplayonpage 5-12)andthe
following soft keys are displayed:
WPT
GOTO
WAYPOINT WAYPOINT WAYPOINT WAYPOINT
EDIT
ERASE
MOVE
D4163-1
The selected waypoint can be edited via these soft keys.
➤ To select a waypoint using the Waypoint List:
1. Press MARKS, followed by the WAYPOINT LIST soft key.
The Waypoint List and associated soft keys are displayed.
The list details all waypoints in alpha-numeric order. The selected way-
point is indicated by the selection bar; its position, bearing and range are
provided.
MARKS
WAYPOINT
LIST
2. Usethetrackpadtomove theselectionbarupanddown thelisttohighlight
the required waypoint.
The selected waypoint can be edited via the soft keys displayed.
Waypoint Data Display
Waypoint data can be viewed in two ways: you can use the context-sensitive
cursor to select the waypoint and thus display the waypoint data box, or you
can view waypoint details on the waypoint list.
Note: To permanently display the target waypoint data box, select it in the
System Set Up menu (see Section 7.3) and use the SCREEN soft key to switch
data boxes on.
➤ To display the waypoint data box, move the cursor over the waypoint.
The waypoint data box is displayed, this indicates waypoint number/name,
bearing and range (or latitude and longitude if selected in system set up).
WAYPOINT 001
BRG
RNG
191oT
2.2nm
D4250-1
While the cursor is over the waypoint, the waypoint soft keys are displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-13
➤ To remove the waypoint data box and soft keys either:
Move the cursor away from the waypoint, or press CLEAR.
➤ To display the waypoint details from the waypoint list:
Select the waypoint in the list as described above.
MARKS
The details for the selected waypoint are displayed in the lower half of the
window. Temperature, depth, date and time are included (if available) for
waypoints placed at the vessel position.
WAYPOINT
LIST
To remove the Waypoint List and return to the default soft key display, press
CLEAR twice.
Editing the Waypoint Details
You can change the name, symbol and position of any waypoint.
➤ To edit a waypoint:
1. Select the waypoint, using the cursor or the waypoint list, as previously
described. The waypoint soft keys are displayed.
EDIT
WAYPOINT
2. Press the EDIT WAYPOINT soft key. The Edit Waypoint soft keys are dis-
played:
SYMBOL
NAME
POSITION
D4166-1
3. To edit the symbol, press the SYMBOL soft key.
Use the soft keys, shown in the following illustration, to highlight the
required symbol, then press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default soft keys.
SELECT SYMBOL
4. To edit the waypoint name, press the NAME softDk417e8-y1 .
The NAME WAYPOINT window is displayed.
Use the trackpad to enter or edit the name:
Use the left or right side of the trackpad to move the cursor to the character
you wish to change.
Use the top or bottom of the trackpad to scroll through the characters.
When you have finished editing the name, to remove the window, press
ENTER to save the name or CLEAR to cancel the operation. The waypoint
name replaces the waypoint number.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default soft keys.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
5. To edit the waypoint position, press the EDIT WAYPOINT soft key, followed
EDIT
WAYPOINT
by POSITION. The Waypoint Position pop-up is displayed.
Use the soft keys to select LAT, LON, BRG or RNG.
Use the trackpad to edit the value:
Use the left or right side of the trackpad to move the cursor to the character
you wish to change.
Use the top or bottom of the trackpad to scroll through the characters.
Adjust each parameter until the waypoint position is correct.
Whenyouhavefinishededitingtheposition, pressENTERto save the position
or CLEAR to cancel the operation. Press ENTER or CLEAR again, the
Waypoint Position window is removed from the screen and the default soft
keys are displayed.
You cannot erase the target waypoint or waypoints that are used in routes.
However, you can remove a waypoint from the current route - see Editing a
Route on page 5-27.
If you try to erase a waypoint that is used in a saved route you are warned
“WAYPOINT IS USED IN A ROUTE & CANNOT BE DELETED”
➤ To delete a waypoint using the cursor:
1. Movethecursoroverthewaypoint, until theletters WPTare displayed. The
WPT
waypoint soft keys are displayed.
ERASE
WAYPOINT
2. Press the ERASE WAYPOINT soft key. The waypoint is removed from the
screen and the Waypoint List is updated.
Note: If you have stopped a GOTO (see Stop Follow or Stop Goto on
page 5-33), thetargetwaypointremainsdisplayedasatarget;youneedtouse
the CLEAR GOTO soft key before you can erase the waypoint using the cursor.
➤ To delete a waypoint using the waypoint list:
1. Select the waypoint from the waypoint list as previously described. The
waypoint list soft keys are displayed.
MARKS
WAYPOINT
LIST
2. Press the EDITWAYPOINT soft key, followed by ERASE WAYPOINT. Theway-
point is removed from the screen and the waypoint list is updated.
Moving a Waypoint
You can move any waypoint except the target waypoint (the waypoint you are
following). You can use the Waypoint soft keys and cursor to move the
selected waypoint, or you can edit the waypoint position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-15
CAUTION:
Take care when editing waypoints as it is possible to move waypoints that
are used in routes stored in the Route Database. In such instances, the
stored route will include the waypoint in its new position.List.
➤ To move a waypoint using the cursor:
1. Movethecursoroverthewaypoint, until theletters WPTare displayed. The
WPT
waypoint soft keys are displayed.
MOVE
WAYPOINT
2. Press MOVE WAYPOINT, the cursor changes to a four-headed arrow.
3. Move the cursor to the required waypoint position.
Press ENTER to set the position and return to normal cursor control.
Press CLEAR to cancel the operation.
➤ To move a waypoint using the Waypoint Edit functions:
1. Selectthewaypointusingeitherthecursororthewaypointlistasdescribed
above. The waypoint soft keys are displayed.
2. To edit the waypoint position proceed as previously described in Editing
the Waypoint Details on page 5-13.
Using the ST60 or ST80 Navigator Keypad
If you have an ST60 or ST80 Navigator Keypad connected on SeaTalk it can
be used to name or edit your waypoints, tracks, or routes on any display in the
system. ThekeypadcanalsobeusedtoselectentriesintheWaypointList. The
Navigatorprovides10dedicatedalphanumerickeys,amultidirectionalcursor
control pad, plus Insert and Delete keys. The small red LED glows when the
keypad is operational.
Note: When using the Navigator Keypad, you should be aware that it can con-
trol several displays simultaneously; any display in edit mode (i.e. ready for
alpha-numeric data entry) will be affected by the Navigator Keypad.
1
abc
2
def
3
ghi
4
jkl
5
mn
6
opq
7
rst
8
uvw
9
xyz
ins
0
del
NAVIGATOR
D1934-2
Figure 5-5: ST80 Navigator Keypad
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Most of the alphanumeric keys are used to input multiple characters. Each
timeyoupressoneofthesekeysinsuccession, thenextcharacteronthatkeyis
input. For example, each press of the 1 key alternately inputs A, B, C, then 1.
A short beep is emitted each time a key is pressed.
The Navigator’s arrow keys function much like the radar/chart display’s
trackpad, enabling you to move the cursor position or input alpha, numeric, or
special characters (. , - / ‘ & ).
The ins key functions the same as the ENTER key on radar/chart display and
del inserts a space during edit mode.
Selecting an Entry in the Waypoint List
3. The Navigator can be used to select an existing item in the Waypoint List.
This can be accomplished using the arrow or alphanumeric keys.
➤ To select an existing item in the Waypoint List:
1. Usetheup and downarrow keys to move theselectionbarup and down the
list to highlight the desired entry.
or
Press the alphanumeric key that contains the first letter or number of the
desired waypoint name. The selection bar moves to the entry starting with
that letter or number.
If more than one entry begins with that character, the selection bar moves
to the first one in the list. Each time the same key is pressed, the selection
bar moves to the entry starting with the next character on the key. If no
entry exists for that character, the entry starting with the nearest previous
character is selected. If the numeric value of the key is input when no
numeric entry exists, the selection bar moves to the first alpha entry.
For example, let’s say we have four waypoints named ORION,
POLARIS, QUANTUM, and 6-GUN. Pressing the opq/6 key four suc-
cessive times would select the waypoints ORION (O), POLARIS (P),
QUANTUM (Q), then 6-GUN (6). However, pressing the rst/7 key four
successive times would select QUANTUM for the first three key presses
because entries beginning with the associated letters do not exist and Q is
the next previous beginning letter. The fourth press of the rst/7 key would
select 6-GUN because no entries begin with a 7 and 6 is the next previous
beginning number.
2. Use the ins key like the display’s ENTER key, to close the Waypoint List.
The del key and left and right arrow keys do not function in select mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-17
Editing Entries in the Waypoint, Route, or Track Lists
You can also use the Navigator Keypad to edit an existing item or to name a
new item in the Waypoint List, Route List, or Track List. You first must enter
the edit mode for the list you want to modify. Methods for editing each list are
described in the respective sections of this chapter.
➤
To edit an item in a list using the Navigator Keypad:
1. If necessary, use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the
desired character position.
2. Press an alphanumeric key until the desired character is displayed. Each
time you press one of these keys in succession, the next character on that
key is input.
or
1. Usetheupanddownarrowkeystoscrollthroughthelistofalpha,numeric,
and special characters until the desired character is displayed (just as you
would with the trackpad). Note that you must use this method to input spe-
cial characters; they are not available using the alphanumeric keys.
Use the del key to insert a space, if required.
2. Use the arrow keys and alphanumeric keys to input the remainder of the
characters required to complete the editing.
3. When done, press the ins key to enter your changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
5.4 Working with Routes
A route is made up of a series of waypoints (maximum 50). To make a route
you place a series of waypoints on the chart, or you can select waypoints from
the Waypoint List. You can also save your vessel’s track as you navigate, then
convert the track to a route - this function is described in Section 5.7.
When a route is created it becomes the current route and is displayed on-
screen. The current route is maintained when you power-off. Only one route
can be current and is displayed (if it is in the field-of-view) as solid lines
connecting waypoints. If you are following the route, the current leg is shown
as a dotted line and previous legs are removed from the screen (although the
waypoints remain displayed). The current route (and its waypoints) is
transferred via SeaTalk to a repeater chart display and other instruments. You
can alsousethe WaypointTransferfunctionstotransferthe route databasetoa
repeater display.
Once you have created a route you can use the GOTO soft keys to follow the
route. In addition, the GOTO default soft key provides various options as
described in Section 5.5.
Up to 20 routes can be saved in the route database. You can then select a route
from the database list as the current route.
The current route can be edited by adding and moving waypoints. The current
routeisalwaysplacedinthedatabaselistasroutenumber0,soyoucaneditthe
current route without affecting the original route in the database. Once a route
has been saved, options are also provided to name a route, erase a route and to
display route details.
Youcanusetherouteinformationtoreviewyourpassageplanbyadjustingthe
planned Speed Over Ground (SOG).
Note:
1.The route database is stored locally, in the display unit on which it was cre-
ated. Although the current route is automatically transferred, you need to use
the WAYPOINT TRANSFER function, described in Section 5.6, to transfer the
completeroutedatabasetoarepeater displayconnectedviahsb2. Alternative-
ly you can save routes, and load them from a user cartridge.
2. It is possible for the current route to be overwritten by a route from another
unit on an integrated system, so it is advisable to save all routes.
This section explains how to perform the following tasks:
• Creating a new route.
• Saving the current route in the database list.
• Clearing the current route.
• Retrieving a route from the database list as the current route.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-19
• Displaying route information, including the route leg data and waypoint
details. Use the waypoint details to review your passage plans for different
speeds.
• Using the database list to erase and name existing routes.
• Editing a route by adding, removing and moving waypoints.
➤ To access the route soft keys, press the default soft key ROUTE:
ROUTE
MAKE
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
CLEAR
ROUTE
MORE¬
D4167-1A
Creating a New Route
Note: If there is a current route, it is cleared when you select MAKE ROUTE. If
you are following the current route you are prompted to STOP FOLLOW. Press
the YES soft key to continue, or NO to abandon route creation. If the route has
not been saved you are prompted to save it.
The chart scenario Make and Follow a Route on page 2-26 provides a simple
example of how to create a route.
There are two methods to create routes, whilst creating a route you can switch
between these methods:
• Selecting existing waypoints from the Waypoint List.
You can edit a route after you have finished making it, as described in Editing
a Route on page 5-27.
➤ To make a new route by placing waypoints:
Note: You can pan the chart and change the scale while placing waypoints.
1. If necessary, move the cursor to the area in which you wish to make the
route, and select a suitable chart scale.
2. Press the ROUTE soft key, then press the MAKE ROUTE soft key. The make
ROUTE
route soft keys are displayed:
MAKE
ROUTE
PLACE UNDO
WAYPOINT WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
USE
WPT LIST
3. Move the cursor to the position on the chartwhereyou want your first way-
point to be. Press the PLACE WAYPOINT soft key.
PLACE
WAYPOINT
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Note: You can position the cursor on an existing waypoint – the cursor text
WPT indicates you are re-using the waypoint rather than placing a new one.
This waypoint is included in the route when you press PLACE WAYPOINT.
The waypoint appears on the screen at the cursor position. The number
displayed alongside the waypoint identifies its position in the route. The
new waypoint is temporarily added to the waypoint list with the first avail-
able waypoint number. The waypoints in the current route are re-num-
bered to identify the new positions.
Note: If you Clear the route before it is Saved, the waypoint is removed.
4. Move the cursor to the next waypoint position. A dotted line connects the
cursor to the last placed waypoint.
5. Press PLACE WAYPOINT again. The waypoint is placed and the dotted line
PLACE
WAYPOINT
changes to a solid line.
If you placed the waypoint incorrectly, you can delete the last-placed way-
point by pressing the UNDO WAYPOINT soft key.
UNDO
WAYPOINT
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have placed all your waypoints. You can
have up to 50 waypoints in a route.
7. When you have entered all your waypoints:
Press the ACCEPT ROUTE soft key (or ENTER) to complete the route. Your
ACCEPT
ROUTE
route is displayed on the screen, and is the current route, but it is not active.
The first waypoint of a new route is outlined with a square, indicating that
it will be the target waypoint when the route is activated. If selected, the
waypoint data box is displayed for the target waypoint.
You can save the route as described below.
Note: The completed route is stored in the display unit, and will be re-dis-
played if you turn the unit off and on again. However, on an integrated system
it is possible for a current route from another unit to overwrite this route; it is
therefore recommended that you Save the route as described below.
➤ To make a new route using the Waypoint List:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key; the route soft keys are displayed.
MAKE
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
CLEAR
ROUTE
MORE¬
D4167-1A
2. Press the MAKE ROUTE soft key; the make route soft keys are displayed.
PLACE UNDO
WAYPOINT WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
USE
WPT LIST
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-21
3. Press the USE WPT LIST soft key; the MAKE ROUTE screen is displayed with
its associated soft keys.
MAKE ROUTE
WAYPOINTS
NEW ROUTE
COWES
01 HARBOUR
GURNARD LEDGE
MAIN CHANNEL
NEEDLES FAIRWAY
PORT SOLENT
02 MAIN CHANNEL
03 COWES
04 LYMINGTON
50°50^000N
001°06^000W
50°52^230N
001°02^390W
348°m 2.30nm
300°m 1.00nm
INSERT REMOVE
WAYPOINT WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
USE
CURSOR
TheavailableWaypointsarelistedinthelefthandcolumn(alphanumeric);the
right hand column lists the waypoints in the New Route, the number indicates
its order in the route. The lower part of the table shows position, bearing and
range of the highlighted waypoint.
You use the trackpad left/right to move control between the two columns (the
highlighted title indicates the selected column) and the trackpad up/down to
scroll through the lists.
4. Select a waypoint from the Waypoint List then go to the New Route col-
umn and select a position in the list.
5. Press the INSERT WAYPOINT soft key to place the waypoint below the
selected position in the Route. You can have up to 50 waypoints in a route.
6. To remove a waypoint from the New Route column, highlight the way-
point and press the REMOVE WAYPOINT soft key.
Notes:(1)Awaypointcannotbeusedmorethanonceinaroute;thosealready
used are displayed in a lighter shade of gray.
Notes:(2)The INSERT WAYPOINTorREMOVE WAYPOINTactionadds/removes
the highlighted waypoint to/from the Route column, regardless of which col-
umn is selected.
7. When all waypoints have been entered, press the ACCEPT ROUTE soft key
(or ENTER) to complete the route.
playedifyouturntheunit off thenon again. However, onan integrated system
it is possible for a current route from another unit to overwrite this route; it is
therefore recommended that you save the route, as described in Saving the
Current Route on page 5-22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Saving the Current Route
You can save up to 20 named routes in the route databaselist. These routes can
then be re-displayed and followed at a later date. When you save the route, all
new waypoints are saved in the Waypoint List.
Note: If the current route has not been saved, when you attempt an operation
that affects this route, e.g. CLEAR ROUTE, you are prompted to save it.
➤ To save and name the current route:
1. To access the SAVE ROUTE soft key, press the ROUTE soft key, followed by
ROUTE
MORE.
SAVE
ROUTE
2. PresstheSAVEROUTEsoftkey. Thesaveroutepop-upandtheNAMEROUTE
soft keys are displayed as illustrated in Figure 5-6.
3. The next available entry on the route list is highlighted.
(If required, you can use the trackpad to select another position in the list;
this can be a blank slot, or an existing route that you no longer require).
SAVE ROUTE
1
2
3
4
5
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
NAME ROUTE?
YES NO
D4155-1
Figure 5-6: Save Route Window
4. If you do not wish to name or re-name the route, press the NO soft key to
clear the list. The route is saved and is listed as Route Not Named.
If you wish to name the route press the YES soft key. Use the trackpad to
move the cursor right or left to the character you wish to edit. Then use the
top or bottom of the trackpad to increase or decrease the letter or number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-23
You can use a Navigator Keypad (see Using the ST60 or ST80 Navigator
Keypad on page 5-15) to name the route.
5. Press ENTER to finish and clear the Name List, or press CLEAR to cancel
the operation. To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER again.
Clearing the Current Route
Youcanclearthecurrentroutefromthescreen. WhenyouselectCLEARROUTE
if the current route has not been saved, you have the option of saving it and, if
you are following the current route, you have the option to stop.
➤ To clear the current route:
1. Press the ROUTE default soft key or place the cursor over a route leg until
the text RTE is displayed.
ROUTE
Press the CLEAR ROUTE soft key.
RTE
2. If you are following the current route the STOP FOLLOW soft keys are dis-
played.
STOP
FOLLOW
To cancel the CLEAR operation press NO.
To stop following and clear the route press YES.
SAVE
ROUTE
To clear the route, without saving it in the route database, press NO.
To save the route in the database, press YES. The Name route soft keys are
displayed and you should continue as described in the previous section,
Saving the Current Route on page 5-22.
The current route is cleared from the screen and the default soft keys are
displayed. You can now use the ROUTE soft keys to make a route, or to show
another route from the database.
Retrieve a Route From the Database
You can select a route as the current route from the database list. The list is
accessed from the second set of ROUTE soft keys.
➤ To select a route as the current route:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key, followed by MORE, then press ROUTE LIST. The
ROUTE
route list is displayed as illustrated in Figure 5-7. The selection bar indi-
cates the selected route.
SHOW
ROUTE
2. Use the trackpad to select the required route then press the SHOW ROUTE
soft key. The chart is re-drawn at a scale suitable to display thewhole route.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
ROUTE LIST
CURRENT
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
1
2
3
4
SHOW
ROUTE
ERASE
ROUTE
ROUTE
INFO
NAME
ROUTE
D4263-1
Figure 5-7: Route List Window
Displaying Route Information
You can display the following information that relates to your route:
• Route leg or waypoint information, using the context-sensitive cursor.
• Details of waypoints in the route, using the soft keys. You can use this
information to review your passage plan.
Route Leg and Waypoint Information
➤ To display information about aroute leg, movethecursorovertheleguntilthe
letters RTE are displayed. A Route Leg data box such as the following is
displayed.
RTE
ROUTE NO.
ROUTE NAME
LEG 02 - 03
0°T
5.5nm
D4259-2
To remove the data box, move the cursor away from the route or press CLEAR.
➤ To display information about a route waypoint, move the cursor over the
waypoint until the letters WPT are displayed. The waypoint data box is
displayed, this box includes the route and waypoint number.
WPT
To remove the data box, move the cursor away from the route or press CLEAR.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-25
Using Route Information to Review Your Passage Plan
Youcanviewdataforallthewaypointsinthecurrentroute, oranysavedroute.
Youselecttheroute fromthedatabase listand theinformationisdisplayedina
Route Information pop-up; the following details are provided for each
waypoint:
Position
Bearing (from previous waypoint)
Length of leg (from previous waypoint)
Total Length
Time (ETA or Elapsed)
Soft keys are provided to toggle the time between ETA or elapsed and to
change the Speed Over Ground (SOG) value; the ETA for each waypoint is
calculatedusingtheselectedSOG, soyoucanchangetheSOGtodetermineits
effect on your ETA.
The chartscenario Review Your Passage Planon page 2-28provides a simple
example of how to use the route information.
➤ To display information about any route in the database:
ROUTE
route list is displayed. The selection bar indicates the selected route.
2. Usethetrackpadtoselecttherequiredroute,thenpresstheROUTEINFO soft
key.
ROUTE
INFO
The Route Information pop-up is displayed. As illustrated in Figure 5-8,
this lists the waypoints in the route and details bearing, length of each leg,
total distance, and either the estimated time of arrival (ETA) or the elapsed
time.
The soft keys allow you to toggle between ETA or total (elapsed) time,
and to change the Speed Over Ground (SOG) value used in the time calcu-
lations. The current selections are highlighted.
➤ To change the SOG used for ETA calculations:
1. Press one of the PLANNED SOG keys to switch from actual to planned SOG.
2. PresstheupordownPLANNEDSOG keystochangetheplannedSOGvalue.
The Time values in the Route Information list are updated.
3. Press the ACTUAL SOG key to use the actual SOG value rather than a
planned one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
INFO FOR ROUTE-CURRENT ROUTE
WPT POSITION BRG DISTANCE TOTAL TIME
°T
nm
nm
ETA
01 50°21^97N --- 0.0
001°15^80W
0.0 --:--
4.4 --:--
10.0 --:--
02 50°21^97N 090 4.4
001°08^75W
03 50°27^48N 000 5.5
001°08^75W
ACTUAL
SOG
1.0kn
TIME
ETA TOTAL
PLANNED SOG
0.0kn
D4264-1
Figure 5-8: Route Information Window
4. Press ENTER to remove the Route Information window, then ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the route soft keys.
5. To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER.
Using the Route List to Erase and Name a Route
You can delete a route and you can re-name a route by selecting the route on
the route list.
➤ To select a route to delete or re-name:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key, followed by MORE, then press ROUTE LIST. The
ROUTE
route list is displayed. The selection bar indicates the selected route.
Press the appropriate soft key – ERASE ROUTE or NAME ROUTE.
2. If you ERASE a route you are prompted to confirm.
Press NO to cancel the operation, then ENTER or CLEAR if you wish to
remove the route list.
ERASE
ROUTE
Press YES to erase the route from the list, then ENTER or CLEAR to remove
the route list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-27
3. If you NAME a route, use the trackpad to move the cursor right or left to the
character you wish to edit. Then use the top or bottom of the trackpad to
increase or decrease the letter or number.
NAME
ROUTE
4. Press ENTER to clear the Name List, or CLEAR to cancel the name then to
return to the default soft key display, press ENTER again.
Editing a Route
Once you have created a route, you can edit it using the Waypoint List as
described in Creating a New Route on page 5-19, or using the context-
sensitive cursor to:
• Insert a Waypoint into the route
• Add waypoints at the end of the route
• Remove a Waypoint
• Reverse a Route
• Move a Waypoint as described in Moving a Waypoint on page 5-14.
Any changes you make to the route, except move a waypoint, affect only the
current route. The current route is always held in position 0 in the database, so
you need to Save the route if you want to keep the changes.
Inserting a Waypoint into a Route
Youcan usethecontext-sensitivecursorto insertoneormore waypointsinthe
current route. However, if the route is being followed you cannot insert a
waypoint into the current leg.
➤ To insert a new waypoint in the current route:
1. Move the cursor over the route leg into which you wish to insert a way-
point. The letters RTE and the route leg data box are displayed. The Route
soft keys are displayed.
RTE
2. Press ENTER. The cursor changes to a four-way arrow, controlling a new
waypoint. The waypoint is connected to the existing waypoints on either
side with a dashed line.
3. Move the new waypoint to the required position, and press ENTER to drop
it and return to normal cursor operation, or CLEAR to abandon the opera-
tion.
The new waypoint is temporarily added to the waypoint list and named with
the first available waypoint number. The waypoints in the current route are re-
numbered to identify the new positions.
Note: If you Clear the route before it is Saved, the new waypoint is removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Adding Waypoints at the End of the Route
➤ To add waypoints at the end of the route:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key, followed by the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
The Make Route soft keys are displayed and the cursor is connected to the
last-placed waypoint with a dotted line. You can add further waypoints to
the route in the same way as for a new route.
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
2. Either:
PLACE
WAYPOINT
i. Move the cursor to the required location, and press PLACE WAYPOINT
soft key.
If you place the waypoint in the wrong position, press the UNDO WAY-
POINT soft key.
UNDO
WAYPOINT
Or
ii. Press USE WPT LIST, the MAKE ROUTE pop-up is displayed.
Select a waypoint from the Waypoint List then press the INSERT WAY-
POINT soft key to place the waypoint at the end of the Route.
3. Placeasmanywaypointsasrequired,andpresstheACCEPTROUTEsoftkey,
ACCEPT
ROUTE
the default soft keys are displayed.
Note: You can UNDO waypoints in the original route, not just the new ones.
Removing a Waypoint from the Route
➤ To remove a waypoint from the current route:
1. Move the cursor over the required waypoint until the letters WPT are dis-
WPT
played. The waypoint soft keys are displayed.
REMOVE
WAYPOINT
route and the route is re-numbered.
Alternatively, you can remove the last waypoint from a route by pressing the
UNDO WAYPOINT soft key, as described above inAdding Waypoints at the End
of the Route on page 5-28.
If the route has not been saved and the waypoint was placed as part of the
route, the waypoint is erased.
If the route has been saved, or the waypoint existed before you created the
route, the waypoint remains on the screen.
Reversing the Route
➤ To reverse the route, so you can Follow the route back:
1. Either press the ROUTE soft key followed by MORE,
or move the cursor over the required waypoint until the letters RTE are dis-
played.
ROUTE
The route soft keys are displayed.
REVERSE
ROUTE
2. Press the REVERSE ROUTE soft key. The current route is reversed on the
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-29
5.5 Following Routes and Going to Points
The default soft key GOTO accesses the functions to FOLLOW a route and GOTO
a waypoint or cursor. When you select the target destination, the chartplotter
calculates bearing, distance and cross track error; this information is passed to
a helmsman or autopilot. You can also restart the cross track error (XTE) from
the actual vessel position to set XTE to zero at that point.
ROUTE
GOTO
SCREEN FIND SHIP
D4160-1
When the chartplotter is following a route, the target destination is indicated
byasquarearoundthewaypoint(orcursormarker)andadottedlineshowsthe
intended track, from your start point or previous waypoint, to the target
waypoint.
This section describes the following:
• Follow a route either forwards, or in reverse order.
• Target Point Arrival
• Other follow route options, including joining at a selected waypoint,
advancing waypoints, and restarting XTE.
• Stop and Restart Follow/Goto.
An alarm is triggered when you approach a waypoint, this section describes
what happens when you arrive at waypoints. Chapter 6 describes how to set
the alarm.
The chartplotter can also display the vessel’s actual track and the track can be
recorded for later display. The Track function is described in the Section 5.7.
➤ To access the Goto/Follow soft keys, press the default soft key GOTO (the soft
keys differ if a follow or goto is already in progress):
GOTO
GOTO
WAYPOINT
GOTO
CURSOR
FOLLOW
ROUTE
D4171-1
Follow a Route
Note: The current route may have been created on this display, or created on
another unit and received on this display via SeaTalk.
If a route has been reversed or if a route on screen was being followed but
stopped before completion, the target waypoint – outlined by a square box –
may be different to when the route was created.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
You should always check the target waypoint before initiating a follow
route.
➤ To follow the current route:
GOTO
1. Press the GOTO default soft key. The Goto/Follow soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE soft key.
FOLLOW
ROUTE
Alternatively, to follow a route:
1. Place the cursor over a route leg until the letters RTE and the route soft keys
RTE
are displayed then press FOLLOW ROUTE.
FOLLOW
ROUTE
Your vessel’s current position becomes the origin, and the target waypoint in
the current route becomes the active target.
The soft keys change as follows:
STOP
FOLLOW
EDIT
ROUTE
CLEAR
ROUTE
REVERSE
ROUTE
D4251_1
These options are described in the following sections.
➤ To follow the current route in reverse:
1. Press the ROUTE default soft key, followed by MORE. The route soft keys
ROUTE
are displayed.
REVERSE
ROUTE
2. Press the REVERSE ROUTE soft key. The current route is reversed on the
screen. Press ENTER or CLEAR.
3. Press the GOTO default soft key. The Goto/Follow soft keys are displayed.
GOTO
4. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE soft key.
FOLLOW
ROUTE
The soft keys change as follows:
STOP
FOLLOW
GOTO
CURSOR
RESTART WAYPOINT
XTE ADVANCE
D4172-1
These options are described in the following sections.
Alternatively:
RTE
1. Place the cursor over the route leg until the letters RTE and the route soft
REVERSE
ROUTE
keys are displayed. Press REVERSE ROUTE then FOLLOW ROUTE.
Your vessel’s current position becomes the origin, and the target waypoint in
the current route becomes the active target.
FOLLOW
ROUTE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-31
Target Point Arrival
The arrival alarm is used to alert you when the vessel is approaching the target
point. The arrivalalarmisdefined as acircle (not visibleon the screen) around
the target. You can specify radius of the arrival alarm (see Section 6.3).
The alarm is triggered when either of the following conditions is met:
• The distance to the target point is less than that specified for the arrival
alarm.
• Yourvesselreaches theclosestpointofapproachtothetarget(defined by a
line passing through the waypoint and perpendicular to the route leg).
➤ To cancel the arrival alarm and go towards the next waypoint in the route,
either
or
press any key
wait for 10 seconds.
Thetargetbecomestheorigin,thenextwaypointbecomesthetargetpoint, and
the two are connected by a dotted line indicating the current leg. Any previous
route leg is removed from the screen, but waypoints remain.
Note: Whenfollowing a routeusing a SeaTalk autopilot, theautopilot willnot
turn to the new waypoint until it is accepted at the autopilot control unit.
Other Follow Route Options
You can use the soft keys to follow a route from a selected waypoint (join a
route), or if already following, you can advance to the next waypoint. You can
also restart the cross track error, setting the current vessel position as the new
origin.
In addition, you can move a selected waypoint as described in Section 5.3, or
remove a waypoint from the route as described in Section 5.4.
Joining a Route
➤ To start tracking the current route at a selected waypoint:
1. Move the cursor over the required waypoint until the letters WPT and the
WPT
waypoint soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the FOLLOW FROM HERE soft key.
FOLLOW
FROM HERE
Your vessel follows the route, using the selected waypoint as the target
point.
3. Toreturntothedefaultdisplay,movethecursorawayfromthewaypointor
press CLEAR or ENTER.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Advancing to a Waypoint
➤ Once you are following a route, you can advance to the next waypoint, even if
you have not reached the current target waypoint:
1. If necessary, press the GOTO default soft key to display the Goto/Follow
GOTO
soft keys.
STOP
FOLLOW
GOTO
CURSOR
RESTART WAYPOINT
XTE ADVANCE
D4172-1
2. Pressthe WAYPOINTADVANCEsoftkey. Thecurrentlegoftherouteisaban-
doned and the next waypoint becomes the target. The display is updated to
show the new route leg.
WAYPOINT
ADVANCE
Restart Cross Track Error (XTE)
While you are following a route, or going to a target point, you can restart the
XTE. This sets the XTE to zero and moves the origin to the actual vessel
position.
Restarting XTE is useful if you find yourself off track and want to go straight
to your target, rather than get back onto the original track.
➤ To restart XTE:
1. Press the GOTO default soft key, the Follow/Goto soft keys are displayed.
GOTO
2. PresstheRESTARTXTE softkey.Therouteoriginmovestothecurrentvessel
RESTART
XTE
position, thus the XTE becomes zero.
Going To an Individual Target Point
Rather than following a route, you can go directly to a selected target point,
this can be an existing waypoint (not in the current route), or the cursor
position.
➤ To navigate directly to an existing waypoint:
1. Usethe trackpadtoposition thecursorovertherequired waypointuntilthe
letters WPT and the waypoint soft keys are displayed.
WPT
GOTO
WAYPOINT WAYPOINT WAYPOINT WAYPOINT
ERASE
MOVE
D4163-1
Alternatively, you can select the waypoint from the waypoint list as described
in Section 5.3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-33
2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT soft key.
GOTO
WAYPOINT
Navigation to the selected waypoint begins. The soft key STOP GOTO is dis-
played.
3. To return to the default soft key display, move the cursor away from the
waypoint or press ENTER or CLEAR.
➤ To navigate directly to the cursor position:
1. Use the trackpad to position the cursor as required.
2. Press the GOTO default soft key, followed by GOTO CURSOR.
If navigation is currently in progress you are warned “Already following
route. Cancel route and goto cursor?”.
GOTO
GOTO
CURSOR
To cancel the GOTO CURSOR operation, press NO.
To continue with the GOTO CURSOR operation (and stop the current GOTO
ROUTE), press YES.
The chartplotter places a temporary waypoint as the target and starts to
navigate towards it. The waypoint is shown as a square with a circle and
dot in the centre, and is connected to the vessel’s starting position with a
dashed line.
STOP
GOTO
The soft key STOP GOTO is displayed.
3. To return to the default soft key display, move the cursor away from the
waypoint or press ENTER or CLEAR.
Stop Follow or Stop Goto
➤ To stop following the route or target point
either:
1. If necessary, press the GOTO soft key, then press the STOP GOTO/FOLLOW
GOTO
soft key.
STOP
GOTO
Or:
1. Move the cursor over any waypoint or leg in the current route, then press
STOP
FOLLOW
the STOP GOTO/FOLLOW soft key.
The dotted line from your vessel to the target waypoint disappears.
If you stopped a GOTO WAYPOINT or CURSOR, to remove the target point from
the screen, move the cursor over the target point then press the CLEAR GOTO
soft key.
If you subsequently use the FOLLOW ROUTE soft key to restart navigation, the
route is followed from the point at which it was stopped. This is indicated by a
square around the target waypoint. If you want to follow from another
waypoint you can initiate the follow then use the WAYPOINT ADVANCE or
FOLLOW FROM HERE soft key to step through the route.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-34
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
5.6 Transferring Waypoints and Routes
Displayed SeaTalk Waypoints
In an integrated system, when a route is made current on any SeaTalk
equipmentit is sent to all SeaTalk instruments, including this chartplotter; this
route will override any other current route. When GOTO waypoint or GOTO
cursor is in operation it is considered a route.
The current route can be edited on any instrument with route edit capability.
Note: Transferred waypoints are not automatically saved by the chartplotter,
however you can save the route locally, thus adding the waypoints to the local
waypoint list.
Managing Database Lists
There are several methods of maintaining database lists. The method you
choose will depend on the links available (SeaTalk, NMEA or hsb2), and
whether you want to transfer individual waypoints or the complete waypoint
and route list:
• You can save the complete Waypoint and Route Lists to a user cartridge in
the chart card slot.
• You can load new Waypoint and Route Lists from a user cartridge in the
chart card slot.
• If waypoints are transmitted by other equipment on SeaTalk or NMEA,
you can receive them on the chartplotter.
When RECEIVE WPTS FROM ST/NMEA is selected, any waypoints sent on
SeaTalk or NMEA are transferred and appended, one-by-one, to the way-
point list; routes sent on NMEA are appended to the route list.
You can use this function to add waypoints from a PC connected via
NMEA.
• You can send the waypoint and route lists from the chartplotter to other
instruments via NMEA using the SEND WPT LIST function.
Sending the waypoint list does not affect current routes.
The NMEA link could be to a PC.
• You can transfer the waypoint and route lists from one chartplotter to
anotheracrossanhsb2 linkusingSENDWPTLISTONHSB andRECIEIVEWPTS
FROM HSB.
CAUTION:
The functions LOAD USER CARD, SEND WPT LIST ON HSB and RECIEIVE WPTS
FROM HSB replace the existing waypoint and route lists with the
transferred lists.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-35
➤ To save waypoints to, or load waypoints from a user cartridge:
CAUTION:
Loading waypoints from a user cartridge overwrites any existing
waypoint and route lists.
1. Insert a C-MAP User Card into the lower of the two cartridge slots.
1. Press MARK S followed by the LOAD/SAVE USER CARD soft key.
2. The User Card Menu and associated soft keys are displayed.
3. Press the SAVE WPT/RTE DATA TO CARD or LOAD WPT/RTE DATA FROM
MARKS
CARD soft key; an appropriate warning and Yes/No soft keys are displayed.
USER CARD MENU
USER CARD PRESENT
WARNING
SAVING DATA TO THE USER
CARD WILL ERASE ALL EXISTING
WAYPOINT AND ROUTE DATA
ON THE CARD.
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
NO
4. Press Yes to continue or No to abandon the operation and return to the pre-
vious screen.
5. If the operation is successful, confirmation of the number of Routes and
Waypoints saved/loaded is displayed.
USER CARD MENU
USER CARD PRESENT
SAVE COMPLETE
SAVED 2 ROUTE(S) AND
7 WAYPOINT(S)
CHECK
CARD IN
USER SLOT
LOAD WPT/ SAVE WPT/
RTE DATA RTE DATA
FROM CARD TO CARD
If the operation fails, the Save Failed message is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-36
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
USER CARD MENU
USER CARD NOT PRESENT
SAVE FAILED
NO OR INCORRECT CARD
ENSURE USER CARD IS CORRECTLY
INSERTED IN THE LOWER SLOT
CHECK
CARD IN
USER SLOT
LOAD WPT/ SAVE WPT/
RTE DATA RTE DATA
FROM CARD TO CARD
➤ To receive incoming waypoints on SeaTalk or NMEA:
MARKS
1. To display the waypoint list press MARKS followed by the WAYPOINT LIST
soft key.
WAYPOINT
LIST
Press the WAYPOINT TRANSFER soft key.
2. Press the soft key RECEIVE WPTS FROM ST/NMEA.
The soft key changes to STOP RECEIVING WAYPOINTS.
When waypoints are transmitted by other equipment they are added to the
waypoint list on the chartplotter. Routes transmitted on NMEA are
appended to the route list.
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
3. To disable waypoint transfer, press the soft key STOP RECEIVING WAY-
POINTS.
Alternatively, press ENTER, or CLEAR, twice to close the Waypoint List.
➤ To send the waypoint list on NMEA:
1. Display the waypoint list as previously described, then press the WAY-
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
POINT TRANSFER soft key.
2. Press the soft key SEND WPT LIST ON NMEA.
The soft key changes to STOP SENDING WAYPOINTS.
The waypoint and route lists are transmitted from the chartplotter to other
instruments on NMEA.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-37
➤ Toreceivethewaypointandroutelistsviahsb2,youmustset-upthetransferon
both display units - one unit will send waypoints, the other will receive them.
CAUTION:
Receiving waypoints from another hsb2 instrument overwrites any
existing waypoint and route lists.
1. Display the waypoint list as previously described, then press the WAY-
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
POINT TRANSFER soft key.
2. Press the soft key SEND WPT LISTON HSBor RECIEIVE WPTS FROM HSB. You
are prompted to confirm:
Press NO to cancel the operation, then ENTER if you wish to close the way-
point list.
Press YES to continue. The waypoint list is transmitted to/from the chart-
plotter from/to another instrument on hsb2. While the data is being trans-
ferred the soft key changes to STOP SENDING WAYPOINTS; when the
transfer is complete the soft key is re-displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-38
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
5.7 Using Tracks
The Track function is used to mark on-screen the trail that your vessel has
followed, as if it had left a visible fixed wake.
While the track is switched on it is recorded in the display unit’s memory. You
specify the interval at which track points are made and a line is drawn on-
screen betweeneachpoint. Up to 4500 trackpointscanbe saved in total:inthe
current track and in up to 5 track files (each a maximum of 750 points). The
current track remains on-screen, even following a power off/on, until you
clear the track.
Breaks in the track will be caused when the display unit is switched off or
either of the following occur for longer than the specified track interval: the
track is switched off then on; the position fix is lost.
To enable you to follow this track on your return voyage, the SmartRoute
function converts the track (or the last segment of a track with breaks) into a
route which is automatically reversed, see SmartRoute on page 5-42.
A track can be saved and retrieved for display at a later date. You can only
display one track at a time; you must clear a current track from the screen if
you want to display a saved track.
This section describes:
• Setting up a track, including how to specify the interval.
• Clearing the current track.
• Managing tracks, using the track list, including Saving, Naming, Erasing
and Showing a track.
• Making a Track into a Route
➤ To access the track controls:
1. From the chart display, press the MENU key to display the chart set up soft
keys.
SYSTEM
SET UP¬
CHART
SET UP¬
TRACK
SET UP¬
GPS
SETUP¬
2. Press the TRACK SETUP soft key to display the TrackDs41o62f-1t keys:
TRACKS
OFF ON
CLEAR
TRACK
MAKE INTO
ROUTE
MORE¬
D5674-1
The following instructions assume you have the track soft keys displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-39
Setting Up a Track
You use the track soft keys to switch the track on and to specify the interval, as
time or distance, at which track points are saved. The time interval between
track points can be set to 1s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1min, 3min, 5min, 10min or
30minutes. The distance spacing between track points can be set to 0.1nm,
0.5nm or 1.0nm. The interval default is a distance of 0.1nm. The maximum
track length is 750 points. When the track has reached this length, the first
points are overwritten. The track issaved until you switchitoff. When the unit
is powered off, the current track (thus far) is retained in memory.
Setting a short time interval between track points is best suited to navigation
within a close or complex environment, e.g. an estuary or marina whereas, in
contrast, a greater distance interval is best suited to a long haul voyage.
Referto the setting guideshown in Figure 5-9 to determine the best settingfor
your planned voyage; this is particularly important if you wish to use
SmartRoute to convert your track to a route.
1 sec 12½ min
5 sec
10 sec
30 sec
1 min
1 hr, 2½ min
2 hrs, 5 min
6 hrs, 15 min
12 hrs, 30 min
1 day, 13 hrs, 30 min
2 days, 14 hrs, 30 min
5 days, 5 hrs
15 days, 15 hrs
3 min
5 min
10 min
30 min
TRACK TIME
0.1 nm
0.5 nm
1.0 nm
75 nm
375 nm
750 nm
D4948-2
TRACK DISTANCE
Figure 5-9: Track Interval Setting Guide
You can change the setting at any time. The setting applies only to the current
track and is not saved as a stored track.
➤ To set up a track:
1. Press the MORE soft key to access the TRACK INTERVAL soft keys.
Pressthe appropriatesoftkeytoseteitheratime intervaloradistance inter-
val;presstheUParrowtoincreasetheinterval,theDOWNarrowtodecrease
the interval.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-40
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Press ENTER to return to the track soft keys.
TRACK INTERVAL
0.1nm
TRACK
LIST
MORE¬
D5674-1
2. Press the TRACK OFF ON soft key to toggle tracks on.
TRACK
OFF ON
Your vessels trail will be displayed on-screen, with a line joining the
points at the selected interval.
Clearing the Current Track
You can clear the current track from the screen. When you select CLEAR
TRACK, if the current track has not been saved, you have the option of saving it.
➤ To clear the current track:
1. Press the CLEAR TRACK soft key.
CLEAR
TRACK
2. If the track has not been saved the SAVE TRACK soft keys are displayed.
To clear the track without saving it in the Track List, press NO.
To save the track in the list, press YES. The Name track soft keys are dis-
played and you should continue as described in the following section, Sav-
ing and Naming a Track.
SAVE
TRACK
Press CLEAR to abort the Clear Track operation.
The current track is cleared from the screen and the default soft keys are
displayed.
Managing Tracks
Although itiseasy tosetupatrack, andthistrackisretainedeven ifyouswitch
off your display, you can store a number of different tracks so that you can
reviewthematalaterdate. Thissectionexplainshowtoperformthefollowing
tasks:
• Save and Name a track.
• Name, Erase and Show an existing track.
Saving and Naming a Track
You can save up to 5 named tracks in the Track List. These tracks can be re-
displayed at a later date.
➤ To save and name the current track:
1. Press the MORE soft key followed by the TRACK LIST soft key. The track list
TRACK
LIST
pop-up and associated soft keys are displayed.
2. The next available entry on the track list is highlighted.
(If required, you can use the trackpad to select another position in the list;
this can be a blank slot, or an existing track that you no longer require).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Standard Chart Operations
5-41
3. Press SAVE TRACK. The name track soft keys are displayed.
SAVE
TRACK
NAME TRACK?
YES NO
D4256-1
4. If you do not wish to name or rename the track, press the NO soft key (or
CLEAR) to clear the list. The track is saved and is listed as Track Not
Named.
move the cursor right or left to the character you wish to edit. Then use the
top or bottom of the trackpad to increase or decrease the letter or number.
You can use a Navigator Keypad (see Using the ST60 or ST80 Navigator
Keypad on page 5-15) to name the track.
5. Press ENTER to finish and clear the Track List, then to return to the default
soft key display, press ENTER again or CLEAR.
Naming, Erasing and Showing a Track
➤ To name an existing track, erase a track or show a track, you select the track
from the track list, then press the appropriate soft key as follows:
1. PresstheTRACKLIST softkey.TheTrackListisdisplayed. Theselectionbar
indicates the selected track.
TRACK
LIST
Select the required track then press the appropriate soft key.
NAME
TRACK
2. If you NAME a track, use the trackpad to move the cursor right or left to the
character you wish to edit. Then use the top or bottom of the trackpad to
edit the letter or number. Press ENTER finish the operation or CLEAR to
cancel the name, then ENTER to remove the track list.
3. If you ERASE a track you are prompted to confirm.
Press NO to cancel the operation, then ENTER to remove the track list.
Press YES to erase the track from the list, then ENTER to remove the track
list.
ERASE
TRACK
4. If you SHOW a track, and you have a current track on screen, you are
promptedtosavethetrack.ProceedaspreviouslydescribedinClearingthe
Current Track.
SHOW
TRACK
Alternatively, press the NO soft key to cancel the SHOW TRACK operation.
The track list is removed and the selected track is displayed.
5. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-42
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
SmartRoute
SmartRoute enables the current track, or the last segment of a track with
breaks, tobe converted toa route (the track could havebeenretrievedfrom the
track list). SmartRoute placesa waypointat the lasttrackpoint, then considers
each point in turn and determines the closest route through the recorded track.
The number of waypoints created is minimized, whilst maintaining optimum
correlation to the recorded track. On completion, the maximum deviation of
the route from the recorded track is displayed.
➤ To convert the current track into a route:
1. Select MAKE INTO ROUTE and press ENTER.
route, with the most recently placed track point as the start of the route, i.e.
the track is reversed.
If there is an unsaved current route on screen, the option to save the route is
given, see Section 5.4, Working with Routes.
2. Check the calculated route and, in particular, that the route deviation from
the original, given in the warning box, is within navigable limits.
CAUTION:
Beforefollowingtheroute,ensurethatitissafefornavigation, notingthat
it may deviate from your actual path travelled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Further Chart Operations
6-1
Chapter 6: Further Chart Operations
6.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the additional functions that are provided on
the chartplotter and combined radar/chartplotter displays.
It covers the following topics:
• Measuring distances and bearings on the chart, using the VRM/EBL key
• Setting alarms and timers
• Man Overboard (MOB)
• Cursor Echo
• GPS Setup
• Data Log Mode
In ordertousesomeofthesefunctions, youmay need thefollowing additional
data from equipment connected to your system via a hsb2, SeaTalk, or NMEA
link:
Table 6-1:
Function of External Data
Data
Example source Integrated functions available
Heading
COG
Compass*
GPS
- Head Up or Course Up heading modes
- MOB (if speed data also available)
Radar data Radar system, via
- Radar data, either full-screen or in a half-screen window
either a
combined unit or
hsb2
Position
GPS system
- Waypoints
- Position, COG, SOG and time data in Data Box and Nav
Window
- MOB
- Data Log
Other data Transducers
- Data Box and Nav Window data displays, including speed,
depth, wind, temperature
*If heading datais availableviabothNMEA and SeaTalk, NMEA data takes priority. For allother data,
SeaTalk data takes priority (see Section 6.3).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
6.2 Measuring Distances Using the VRM/EBL Key
You can obtain an accurate measurement of the distance and bearing between
two points by using the VRM/EBL key.
➤ To place a ruler line and Ruler data box:
1. Position the cursor on the starting point from which you wish to measure.
VRM/EBL
2. Press VRM/EBL.
A Ruler data box is displayed showing the bearing and distance from the
location.
3. Use the trackpad to move the cursor to the measurement end point. A line
connects the cursor to the starting point, and the Ruler data box is updated
to show the bearing and length of the line as shown in Figure 6-1.
4. Press ENTER to fix the end point of the ruler line, and return to normal cur-
sor control. The letter B marks the location of the end point on the chart.
Figure 6-1: Measuring Distance Using a VRM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Further Chart Operations
6-3
➤ To re-position one end of the ruler line:
1. Move the cursor over the ruler line towards the end that you want to re-
position, until the letters A¡ B are displayed.
2. Press ENTER to take cursor control of the ruler. The ruler end moves to the
cursor which changes to a four-headed arrow.
3. Move the cursor to the required position. The ruler data box is updated.
4. Press ENTER again to set the position and return to normal cursor control.
Alternatively, press CLEAR to reset the ruler to the previous position.
➤ To clear the ruler line and ruler data box
either:
Move the cursor over the ruler line, until the letters A¡ B are displayed, then
press CLEAR.
VRM/EBL
or:
Press VRM/EBL, the ruler soft keys are displayed. Press RULER OFF ON to
RULER
OFF ON
toggle the ruler line and data box off.
➤ To clear the ruler data box:
Press VRM/EBL, the ruler soft keys are displayed. Press RULER DATABOX OFF
ON to toggle the ruler data box off.
RULER
DATABOX
OFF ON
➤ To move the Ruler data box, using the context-sensitive cursor:
BOX
1. Move the cursor over the box until the letters BOX are displayed, and press
ENTER to take cursor control of the box.
2. Use the trackpad to move the box to its new location, and press ENTER to
drop it and return to normal cursor operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
6.3 Alarms and Timers
Alarm Reporting
The chartplotter reports the following alarms, that are set using the ALARMS
ALARMS
key:
Alarm
Indicates:
Arrival
Your vessel has arrived at the active waypoint: it has either
reached the arrival circle (the radius of which is specified) or,
has reached its closest point of approach (defined by a line
passing through the waypoint and perpendicular to the route
leg).
Off Track
Anchor
Your vessel has exceeded the specified distance (maximum
cross track error) from the active route leg.
Your vessel has drifted from its anchor position (set when the
alarm was turned on) by more than the specified distance.
Grounding
The chartplotter checks a sector ahead of your vessel for a
dangerous object (land, depth area, intertidal area, rock,
obstruction or shore obstruction). You specify the depth and
range of the sector from your vessel.
You can view a report of the objects that triggered the alarm.
Countdown
The countdown timer has reached zero.
Alarm Clock The time matches the specified alarm time.
The alarms are switched on or off, and the limits set, using the Alarms Set Up
menu, accessed from the ALARMS key.
When an alarm is triggered, the alarm buzzer sounds and a pop-up window
describing the alarm is displayed.
➤ To silence the alarm and clear the message, press any key.
If the alarm was generated by the chartplotter, the appropriate action is taken.
For example, following an arrival alarm, the next route leg is activated.
If an anchor alarm is silenced, but the alarm condition perstists, the alarm is
repeated every 30 seconds.
External Alarms
All SeaTalk system alarms (except autopilot alarms) are received and
displayed on the chartplotter. You can silence these alarms by pressing any
key. No other action is taken by the chartplotter except to silence the alarm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Further Chart Operations
6-5
Setting Alarms and Timers
➤ To set up an alarm or timer:
1. Press the ALARMS key. The Alarms Set Up menu is displayed, showing
the current settings (see Figure 6-2).
ALARMS
2. Use the trackpad to move the selection barup ordown theoptions. Aseach
line is highlighted, the soft key labels are updated to show the current set-
tings and controls.
ALARMS SET UP
ARRIVAL ALARM
0.01nm
ON
OFF TRACK ALARM
ANCHOR ALARM
OFF
GROUNDING ALARM
COUNTDOWN TIMER
ALARM CLOCK
5M/1.0nm
00:33:00
OFF
SELECT ARRIVAL
ALARM RADIUS
D4265-4
Figure 6-2: Alarms Set Up List
3. Use the up or down soft keys to change the alarm setting. For example, for
the arrival alarm you can adjust the radius from the waypoint at which the
arrival alarm will be triggered.
The arrival, off track and anchor alarm distances can be set in the range
0.01 to 9.99 nm, in steps of 0.01nm.
Thegrounding alarm depth canbe setfrom1to20m in 1mstepsandcanbe
specified to cover a sector at a range from 0 to 1nm, in 0.1nm steps.
Thetimerissetinhours, minutesandseconds, andthealarm clockinhours
and minutes.
4. If required, press the ALARM OFF ON soft key to toggle the alarm on or off.
If youturn an alarmoff, itsvalue is retained andwillbeused when you turn
the alarm on again.
ALARM
OFF ON
Note: You can turn all the alarms and timers on and off, except for the Arrival
Alarm which is always on.
5. Press ENTER to save the changes and clear the list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
6.4 Man Overboard (MOB)
If you losea personorobjectoverboard, and need to return to the location, you
should use the Man Overboard (MOB) function.
You can select the type of data used for the MOB position using the set up
menus (see Section 7.3).
Note: To obtain MOB position, you need either of the following:
• Position data from a GPS or equivalent device
• Heading and speed data, so that the position can be calculated by dead
reckoning
➤ To initiate the MOB procedure, press and hold the MARKS key for two
seconds. The system then performs the following tasks automatically:
MARKS
• Redrawsthechartat1/2nm(evenifcartographyisnotavailablebutplotter
mode is on).
• Marks the current position with a MOB symbol
current active waypoint and route.
which replaces any
• Displays the MOB data box, showing the bearing and distance from your
vessel to the MOB waypoint position, and the elapsed time since the MOB
was initiated (Figure 6-3).
• Displays the position data box, showing your vessel’s position.
• As your vessel moves from the MOB position, a dotted line is displayed
connecting the MOB symbol and the vessel’s current position.
• Sounds a 4-second alarm pattern every 30 seconds.
• Sends an MOB message (including bearing and distance) to other units in
the system, via the SeaTalk connection.
MOB position
MOB
RNG 0.33nm
BRG 162°T
00:05:24
POSITION
N 49°54^76
W 002°09^83
MOB data box
D4273-2
Figure 6-3: MOB Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Further Chart Operations
6-7
➤ To cancel the MOB, press and hold the MARKS key for 2 seconds.
The chart is re-drawn at its previous scale, and the MOB symbol and data box
MARKS
are removed.
Note: The MOB procedure can also be initiated or cancelled if the appropri-
ate SeaTalk message is received by the display unit.
6.5 Cursor Echo
In a combined radar/chart display, or in a system with a radar display
connected via SeaTalk, you can set the display to enable cursor echo. Cursor
echo (accessed from System Set Up, described in Section 7.3) enables you to
display aradarcursoron thechartpicture, orachart cursor on the radarpicture
(youcannotdisplayaremotechartcursorinachartwindownoraremoteradar
cursor in a radar window).
The following options can be toggled ON or OFF:
• Radar Cursor In : displays the cursor from another radar on the chart dis-
play or chart window (default - OFF).
• Chart Cursor In: displays the cursor from another chartplotter on the
radar display or radar window (default - OFF).
Note: The remote display must have SeaTalk Cursor Out enabled.
Raymarine recommend that in multi-display systems, you do not enable Cur-
sor Out on more than two displays. If multiple displays have cursor out en-
abled, the cursors will not be displayed simultaneously, but will flash on/off.
• SeaTalk Cursor Out: enables the output, onto SeaTalk, of the display’s
own cursor (default - OFF).
• CursorEchoLocal:echoesthecursorpositionbetweenopenwindowson
the same display (default - ON).
If you set the options to OFF, no cursor echo information is displayed.
When the appropriate option is switched on, the display shows its own cursor,
plusthe cursoroftheotherdisplaywithappropriate cursortext(RDR orCHT)to
indicate its origin. This means that you could move the cursor over a target on
the radar display, and check the identity of the target by looking at the radar
cursor position on the chartplotter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
6.6 GPS Setup
GPS set up page provides you with information and the status of the tracked
navigationsatellitesforaSeaTalkGPS. ItalsoenablesyoutoSETUPaSeaTalk
Differential GPS, by manually retuning it to a different differential beacon.
The GPS Navigation Status pop-up window (shown in Figure 6-4) provides,
for each tracked satellite, the satellite number, a graphical signal strength bar
and its current usage status. HDOP and satellite Fix Status are also displayed.
Data for up to 12 satellites are shown.
NAVIGATION STATUS
SAT
AZ
ELEV
SIGNAL
STATUS
03
31
21
23
22
19
17
27
16
15
IN USE 085
IN USE 292
IN USE 127
IN USE 075
IN USE 174
IN USE 290
IN USE 056
SPARE 321
SPARE 024
SPARE 237
085
051
048
043
028
014
012
011
005
065
HDOP
FIX STATUS
1
FIX
D-GPS
SETUP¬
RESTART
GPS
D4281-2
Figure 6-4: Navigation Status Window
Positional accuracy is dependent upon certain parameters; in particular for
GPS, the azimuth and elevation angles are used in a triangulation process to
calculate position. HDOP (Horizontal Dilution Of Position) is a measure of
this accuracy; a higher figure signifies greater error. In ideal circumstances,
the figure should be in the region of 1.0. The Fix Status can indicate:
• FIX, where a satellite fix has been acquired.
• D-FIX, where a differential beacon fix has been acquired.
• SD-FIX, where a satellite differential fix has been acquired.
• NO FIX, where no fix can be acquired.
➤ To select GPS Set Up:
MENU
Press MENU, then press the GPS SETUP... soft key.
The Navigation Status pop-up window shown in Figure 6-4 is displayed.
GPS
SETUP¬
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Further Chart Operations
6-9
Restart GPS
This soft key enables re-acquisition of a GPS position fix.
Note: Under normal circumstances RESTART GPS is not required.
D-GPS Set Up
The D-GPS SET UP function provides the ability to set up an external
DifferentialGPS, eitherautomatically (default) orby manuallyretuningitto
a different differential beacon.
In AUTO mode, the D-GPS is set to automatic and beacon selection is made
automatically by the beacon receiver. The beacon frequency and bit rate
received from the beacon receiver are displayed. The soft keys are disabled
and grayed out.
In MANual mode, youcanselectthe beaconfrequency and bit rate thatare sent
to the beacon receiver.
When you select D-GPS SETUP a pop-up window, providing the following
parameters, is displayed with associated soft keys:
• Beacon ID - This shows the Beacon ID of the beacon transmitter. If no bea-
con has been found this item states NOT LOCKED.
• Beacon Frequency - Both the menu itemand associated soft keys show the
currently used differential beacon’s frequency in kHz. The frequency
range available is 283.5kHz to 325.0kHz.
• Bit Rate - Both the menu item and associated soft keys show the currently
used differential beacon’s bit rate in bps. The rates available are 50bps,
100bps and 200bps.
• Signal Strength and Signal to Noise Ratio - These items indicate the
received signal strength and Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) in dB, received
from the beacon receiver. If the display unit is using RTCM data received
via NMEA, this information is not available and the item shows dashes,
one per character. The received Signal Strength and SNR are interrelated.
SNR provides a measure of the quality of the received signal and is depen-
dent upon signal strength.
• Differential Age - This indicates the time elapsed since the last differential
beacon correction update.
➤ To tune a differential SeaTalk GPS to another beacon:
1. Press D-GPS SETUP, the Differential GPS Setup pop-up is displayed.
2. Press MODE AUTO MAN to toggle between AUTO and MAN modes; the
D-GPS
SETUP¬
selected mode is highlighted is indicated in the pop-up window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Note: If the display unit is receiving RTCM data via NMEA, repeating a dif-
ferential fix from another unit, the MODE soft key is set to AUTO and is grayed
out. If receiving RTCM data, the setting must be performed manually on the
external DGPS receiver.
3. To set a new beacon manually, press BEACON SELECT, use the soft keys to
set the required beacon frequency and bit rate.
Press ENTER to return to the Differential GPS Setup pop-up window.
The status of the selected beacon is displayed in the pop-up.
Press ENTER to return to the Navigation Status window, then ENTER to
return to the MENU soft keys.
6.7 Data Log Mode
You can set the chartplotter to log course data every thirty minutes. Up to 48
log entriesare held, when48 entrieshavebeen made, the chartplotterwillstart
overwriting the first entries.
You start the log using soft keys provided in Data Log Mode. When you select
DataLogModethelogisdisplayedfull-screen.Ifthescreenisfull,youusethe
trackpad to scroll the list and view further log entries. Each line in the log
shows:
• Time of log entry
• Position at time of log entry
• Course Made Good (CMG) since last log entry
• Distance Made Good (DMG) since last log entry
Once you have enabled the data log, data is continually logged, but you must
set the display to Data Log Mode to view it. You use the DISPLAY key to
change the full-screen mode.
You can stop the log at any time and you can clear the log from memory.
If the chartplotter is switched off while the log is running, a dashed line willbe
displayed before the first new entry since switching the chartplotter on again.
➤ To activate Data Log Mode:
DISPLAY
2. Press DISPLAY again, until LOG is selected, then press ENTER.
➤ To start recording log entries, press the START LOG soft key.
Asshown in Figure 6-5, thechartplotterrecords the time and vessels position.
Every thirty minutes the time, new position, distance made good and course
made good are recorded.
START LOG
The START LOG soft key changes to STOP LOG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Further Chart Operations
6-11
TIME POSITION
CMG
DMG
6.86KM
15:30
16:00
16:30
17:00
17:30
18:00
18:30
19:00
19:30
346°M
50°21^890N
001°20^610W
50°18^010N
001°20^070W
50°21^850N
001°19^290W
50°18^500N
001°21^300W
50°20^990N
001°18^280W
50°19^660N
001°21^960W
50°19^730N
001°18^030W
50°20^930N
001°21^750W
50°18^550N
001°18^650W
7.23KM
7.23KM
6.67KM
5.74KM
5.00KM
4.63KM
5.00KM
5.74KM
180°M
012°M
206°M
043°M
245°M
093°M
302°M
145°M
STOP LOG
CLEAR LOG
D4284-1
Figure 6-5: Data Log Window
➤ To stop recording log entries:
Press the STOP LOG soft key.
➤ To clear the log entries:
STOP LOG
PresstheCLEARLOG softkey, youareprompted “AreYou Sure”. To cancel the
CLEAR LOG operation press the NO soft key.
CLEAR LOG
To continue press the YES soft key, all log entries are deleted, but the data log
remains active.
➤ To return to the chart display:
DISPLAY
Press DISPLAY to select the chart mode, then press ENTER.
The log continues until you return to the data log mode and press STOP LOG.
STOP LOG
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-12
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-1
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7.1 Introduction
Once you have installed your display unit and are familiar with its basic
operation (described in Chapter 1 and Chapter 2), you needto set it up so that
itobtainsthecorrectinformationfromtheequipmentyouhaveconnecteditto,
operates according to your requirements, and displays information according
to your preferences.
This is achieved using the soft key controls that are displayed when you press
MENU
the MENU key.
In most cases, you will only need to use the MENU key options when you first
set up your system. However, you may decide to change the way you have
customized some aspects, such as the screen and help setting, as you become
more familiar with your system.
Onceyouhavesetthevalues,theyremainasthedefaultsettingsuntilyoureset
them; they are retained even if you power off your display.
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Changing the default set up parameters
• System parameter functions and default settings
• Radar-specific parameter functions and default settings
• MARPA specific parameters and default settings
• Advanced Radar functions
• Chart specific parameter functions and default settings
You should check the functions of the parameters, and decide on the new
settings, before making the changes.
Note: The SYSTEM SET UP menu option from the chartplotter display is the
same as that accessed from the radar display SYSTEM SET UP menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
7.2 Changing the Set Up Parameters
The set up parameters are divided into four sections:
• System, to control the aspects of the system that are not specific to the
radar or chart.
• Radar, includes bearing alignment, display preferences and the timed
transmission option.
• MARPA, to control the MARPA target tracking parameters, including tar-
get vectors, safe zone and target history display.
• Advanced, to control specialist radar settings such as display timing, STC
preset and tune preset (see Section 7.6 for instructions on how to access
these functions).
• Chart, tocontrolthechartplotterdisplay, includingwaypointinformation,
vectors and radar/chart synchronization.
Note: The GPS and Track Set Up menus are described in Chapter 6.
This section provides instructions for displaying and changing the default
values. The following sections list the parameters and their possible settings,
and describe the function of each parameter in turn.
➤ To set the default parameters:
1. Press the MENU key to display the set up soft keys - the options available
MENU
depend on the selected operating mode.
Radar
SYSTEM
SET UP¬
RADAR
SET UP¬
MARPA
SET UP¬
D3640-3
Chart
SYSTEM
SET UP¬
CHART
SET UP¬
TRACK
SET UP¬
GPS
SETUP¬
D4162-1
2. Press the soft key for the set up you require.
The requested set up menu is displayed, listing the parameters and their
current settings.
3. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar up and down the list. An arrow
is displayed at the top or bottom right-hand corner if you can scroll the list
to display further parameters.
As each line is highlighted, the soft keys are updated to show the settings
available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-3
• For parameters that have a numeric value, or more than four possible
settings, a scroll list is displayed above two of the soft keys.
• Some parameters are controlled by a slider that is displayed above two
of the soft keys.
• For some parameters, a soft key provides access to a sub-menu of fur-
ther options.
4. Pressthesoftkeycorrespondingtothedesiredsettingor,forscrolllists,use
the soft keys to scroll forwards or backwards through the list until the
required setting is displayed. This setting is retained when you move the
selection bar on to the next parameter in the menu list.
For sliders, press the appropriate soft key repeatedly to increase or
decrease the slider value in individual steps, or press and hold the key to
change the setting quickly.
5. Once you have set all the required values, press ENTER to clear the menu
and return to the set up soft keys.
6. Press ENTER, MENU or CLEAR to clear the soft keys and return to the
default display.
You can return all the settings to their original factory settings, if required, by
performing a factory reset as described in Chapter 9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
7.3 System Set Up Parameters
The following table lists the System menus and their options, shows the
factory default setting, and provides a space for you to make a note of your
new default setting. Each parameter is described in the following subsections.
Table 7-1:
System Set Up Parameters
Menu
Options
Factory
Default
New
Default
DATA BOXES
POSITION
SPEED
OFF, LAT/LONG, TDs
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF, APP, TRUE or BOTH
OFF, LAT/LON, or
RNG/BRG/TTG
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DEPTH
COG
SOG
TIME
DATE
WIND
WAYPOINT
CROSS TRACK ERROR OFF or ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
HEADING
LOG/TRIP
PILOT
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
VMG
OFF, WIND, WPT or BOTH
TEMPERATURE
TIDE SET/DRIFT
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
BEARING MODE
MAGNETIC, TRUE
TRUE
CURSOR REFERENCE
CURSOR READOUT
MAG/TRUE, RELATIVE
RELATIVE
RNG/BRG
OFF,LAT/LONG,RNG/
BRG,BOTH
DAY/NIGHT
HELP
DAY, NIGHT
OFF/ON
DAY
ON
SOFT KEYS
OFF/ON
ON
KEY BEEP
OFF/ON
ON
MOB DATA
PILOT POP-UP
MENU TIMEOUT PERIOD
DR, POSITION
OFF/ON
DR
OFF
NO TIMEOUT, 10, 20, 30
SECONDS
NO TIMEOUT
DISTANCE UNITS
SPEED UNITS
NAUTICAL MILES, STATUTE
MILES, KILOMETERS,
KILOYARDS
NAUTICAL MILES
KNOTS
KNOTS, MILES PER HOUR,
KILOMETERS PER HOUR
DEPTH UNITS
METERS, FEET, FATHOMS
CENTIGRADE, FAHRENHEIT
FEET
TEMPERATURE UNITS
FAHRENHEIT
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-5
Table 7-1:
System Set Up Parameters
Menu
Options
Factory
Default
New
Default
VARIATION SOURCE
AUTO, MANUAL
OFF or ON
AUTO
ON
BRIDGE NMEA HEADING
NMEA OUT SET UP
APB
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
BWC
BWR
DBT,
DPT
MTW
RMB
RSD
RTE
TTM
VHW
VLW
WPL
GGA
GLL
RMA
RMC
VTG
ZDA
CURSOR ECHO
RADAR CURSOR IN
CHART CURSOR IN
S/T CURSOR OUT
CURSOR ECHO LOCAL
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
DATE FORMAT
TIME FORMAT
TIME OFFSET
DD/MM/YY, MM/DD/YY
12 HOUR, 24 HOUR
MM/DD/YY
12 HOUR
UTC
UTC, or local offset value:
Plus or minus up to 13 hours,
in whole hours
GPS SOG/COG FILTER
HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW
MEDIUM
-
COMPASS SET UP
LINEARISE COMPASS
Press soft key to start the
linearisation procedure and
to align the heading
ALIGN HEADING
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH (UK), ENGLISH
(US), DANISH, FRENCH,
GERMAN, DUTCH, ITALIAN,
ICELANDIC, NORWEGIAN,
PORTUGUESE, SPANISH,
SWEDISH, FINNISH
ENGLISH (US)
SIMULATOR
OFF, DATA, RADAR, BOTH
OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Data Boxes
PresstheSELECT BOXES softkey to display the databox sub-menu. Thisallows
you to select up to 6 data boxes that you can display.
Note: 1. A fixed set of 9 of these data items are available for display in the Nav
Data half-screen window (see Chapter 2).
2. In additionto thesegrouped data boxes, boxes for the cursorreadout, VRM/
EBL data, waypoint data, MOB data and simulator status are displayed when
selected or when the appropriate function is active.
3.Radar data is only repeated if the display is connected to an hsb2 series ra-
dar master display.
Data boxes provide regularly used data in a compact form so that most of the
picture can still be seen. The ones you select here can be turned on and off as a
groupduringnormaloperation, andyoucanalsomovethemaroundthescreen
individually using the context-sensitive cursor (see Context-Sensitive Cursor
Control on page 1-17.).
Bearing Mode
The mode (magnetic or true) of all the bearing and heading data displayed.
This is indicated in the radar status bar after the heading value.
Cursor Reference
The mode of the bearing data displayed for the cursor readout. The bearing
information can be displayed in either of two forms:
• Relative: The bearing relative to your vessel’s heading.
• Mag/True: The actual bearing in either degrees magnetic or degrees true.
This option is only available in Radar mode ifyour system includes a radar
display and you have heading data from a compass.
If you choose this mode, the selection you made for the previous parame-
ter (Bearing Mode), °M or °T, is displayed in the cursor (Rng/Brg) data
boxes. The current units are shown for the heading value in the status bar
at the top of the screen.
Cursor Readout
Thisoptioncontrolswhetherthecursordata isshowninlatitude andlongitude
or in range and bearing. Alternatively, you can show both types of readout, in
separate boxes, or turn the cursor data box off.
You can also turn the cursor readout box(es) on and off during normal
operation, via the SCREENdefault softkey (seeSwitching the CursorDataBox
On and Off on page 2-13.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-7
Day/Night
This option allows you to change the display between day and night modes.
If you select NIGHT mode, a different palette, more suited to night time
viewing is used.
Help
When Help is set to ON, a prompt appears when selecting a soft key or menu
choice, and when using the context-sensitive cursor. The help message is
cleared when an action is selected.
Soft Keys
WhentheSoftKeysoptionissettoON, thedefaultsoftkeysaredisplayedifno
other operation is in progress.
When the Soft Keys option is set to OFF, the default soft keys are only
displayed when a soft key is pressed, and they disappear if no operation is
performed for 10 seconds.
Key Beep
This option controls whether or not the keys make a noise when you press them.
MOB Data
This option controls whether MOB data is based on position data, or on dead
reckoning (DR). Dead reckoning normally provides a better indication of the
course to an object in the water, on the assumption that your vessel and the
object are both subject to the same tide and wind effects.
Autopilot Pop Up
Thisoptioncontrolswhetherornottheautopilotpopupisdisplayed.Whenset
to ON, if the status and locked heading of the autopilot changes, they are
displayed in a pop up box. The box is removed from the display after two
seconds.
When Autopilot Pop Up is set to OFF, the pop up box is disabled.
Menu Timeout Period
With no timeout set, menus and soft key labels remain displayed until you
clear them by pressing ENTER, CLEAR or the appropriate dedicated key.
Ifyousetavaluehere, themenusandsoftkeylabelswillbeclearedifakeyhas
not been pressed for the specified number of seconds.
This setting does not affect the defaultsoft key labels, which are controlled by
the Soft Keys option (see above).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Units
You can set the units for speed, depth and temperature. The units you set will
be used to display all data, including information received from other
instruments on the system. However, the distance units do not affect the
instrumented range of the radar, which is always in nautical miles.
Variation Source
The variation value is the difference between True and Magnetic direction
data for heading or bearing values. The Variation Source option provides soft
keys for selecting Auto or Manual variation mode, displays the current
variation value for each and highlights the currently selected mode.
Auto Mode
If you select Auto mode, the display obtains the value of variation
automatically, normally from received data. The variation value that is used
dependsonthe dataavailable, andisselectedinthefollowing orderofpriority:
1. Variation value from the same source as the heading data:
• If heading data is being taken from NMEA, then variation is also taken
from NMEA
• If heading is taken from SeaTalk, then SeaTalk variation is used
2. Variation value from a different source:
• If heading data is being taken from NMEA, but no NMEA variation is
available, then variation is taken from SeaTalk
• If heading is taken from SeaTalk, but no SeaTalk variation is available,
then variation is taken from NMEA
3. A calculated variation value, using position data, if no SeaTalk or NMEA
value is available
4. The current manual variation value, if no SeaTalk or NMEA value and no
position data is available
Manual Mode
If you select Manual mode, by pressing either of the MANUAL keys, you can
specify the local variation value according to the area in which you are
operating. Press the appropriate MANUAL key to adjust the variation up or
down, to a maximum of 30° East or West.
This value is then transmitted to any other SeaTalk instruments on your
system. It is retained if you turn the display off and on again.
In Manual mode, incoming NMEA variation is ignored. However, if the
variation is changed on another SeaTalk instrument, the newvalue is used and
the manual value that is displayed is updated.
Note: The Manual variation value defaults to 0°, so it is important to set up a
value if variation is not available from an external source.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-9
Bridge NMEA Heading
The hsb2 seriesdisplays bridge NMEA input data to the SeaTalk bus (see
Section 8.8). The Bridge NMEA Heading option can be used to prevent
NMEA heading data being bridged onto the SeaTalk bus.
For example, if you have a course computer connected on SeaTalk and
NMEA, and an active compass connected on NMEA (for MARPA), SeaTalk
data overrides NMEA data in the course computer. You should therefore
switch OFF the Bridge NMEA Heading option to ensure the course computer
receives the same NMEA heading input as the radar system.
NMEA Out Set Up
This option lets you switch off individual NMEA out sentences.
Cursor Echo
You can set up an integrated system so that radar and chartplotter displays
connected via SeaTalk can display each other’s cursors.
Cursor echo functions so that you can display a chart cursor on the radar
picture, or a radar cursor on the chart picture (you cannot display a remote
radar cursor in a radar window nor a remote chart cursor in a chart window).
When the appropriate options are switched on, each display shows its own
cursor, plus the cursor of the other display with appropriate cursortext (RDR or
CHT) to indicate its origin. This means that you could move the cursor over a
targetonthe radardisplay, and checkthe identity ofthe target by looking atthe
radar cursor position on the chartplotter.
Press the CURSOR ECHO soft key to display the cursor transfer soft keys. The
following options can be toggled ON or OFF:
• Radar Cursor In: displays the cursor from another radar on the chart dis-
play or chart window (default - OFF).
• Chart Cursor In: displays the cursor from another chartplotter on the
radar display or radar window (default - OFF).
Note: The remotedisplaymusthaveSeaTalk Cursor Outenabled. Raymarine
recommend that in multi-display systems, you do not enable Cursor Out on
more than two displays. If multiple displays have cursor out enabled, the cur-
sors will not be displayed simultaneously, but will flash on/off.
• SeaTalk Cursor Out: enables the output, onto SeaTalk, of the display’s
own cursor (default - OFF).
• CursorEchoLocal:echoesthecursorpositionbetweenopenwindowson
the same display (default - ON).
If you set the options to OFF, no cursor echo information is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-10
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Date and Time Settings
Set your preferred date format (DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY) and time
format (12 or 24 hour). If you wish to display local time, use the soft keys to
change from UTC to the required time offset. This can be up to plus or minus
13 hours, in hourly steps.
GPS SOG/COG Filter
The SOG/COG filter averages the velocity vectors to compensate for the
oscillating motion of the vessel, giving a clearer indication of the vessel’s
courseandspeed.ThefilterdoesnotaffectthecalculationoftheGPSposition.
The velocity vectors calculated from the GPS Signal give an instantaneous
measure of speed and direction of the GPS antenna. The COG and SOG can
therefore seem erratic under certain conditions. For example, when a vessel is
moving slowly through rough seas, the antenna moves from side to side as
well as in the direction of the vessel.
Slow moving vessels, or vessels sailing in rough seas will benefit from a high
setting, whereasapowerboatthatcan quickly changespeedanddirectionwill
benefit from a low setting.
Select the SOG/COG filter setting as required. This can be set to HIGH,
MEDIUM or LOW.
Compass Set Up
This option is used to calibrate a Raymarine heading sensor such as the
Pathfinder Smart Heading System. Controls are provided for Linearise
Compass which detects and corrects for heading errors caused by metal
objects, and Align Heading which matches the displayed heading to a known
heading or transit.
Refer to the Handbook supplied with your heading sensor for more details.
Language
Select the language in which you wish information to be displayed. The
selected language will be used for screen text, labels, menus and options, but
will not affect the letters displayed by the context-sensitive cursor. The
language setting also affects the display format for lat/long position
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-11
Simulator
The simulator allows you to operate your display without data from the
antenna and/or external data sources. The system set up simulator options
have the following functions:
• Data provides simulated numerical data, and a waypoint display.
• Radar provides simulated radar picture, with example targets. The pic-
turedoesnot changeif youchangetherange, although therangeringsare
adjusted (see Chapter 3).
• Both provides simulated data and radar picture.
When the simulator is switched on, a SIMULATOR data box is displayed during
operation, showing the simulation selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-12
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
7.4 Radar Set Up Parameters
The RADAR SET UP option allows you to set up the radar according to your
system configuration and your personal preferences.
Note: Some parameters can only be changed if you are using the Master dis-
play (that is, the display to which the scanner is connected).
The following table lists the Radar Set Up parameters and their options,
shows the factory default setting, and provides a space for you to make a
note of your new default setting. Each parameter is described in the fol-
lowing subsections.
Table 7-2:
Radar Set Up Parameters
Parameter
Options
Factory Default
RELATIVE
New Default
EBL DISPLAY
MAG/TRUE, RELATIVE
OFF, ON
TIMED
OFF
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT PERIOD 10 scans, 20 scans, 30 scans
20 scans
STANDBY PERIOD
3, 5, 10 or 15 mins
10 minutes
DEFAULT MARK
SYMBOL
,
,
,
MARK DISPLAY
CLEAR MARKS
OFF, ON
ON
Press soft key to clear marks
database
N/A
CUSTOM SCALE
OFF, ON,SET RANGES...
Slider value
OFF
BEARING
0°
ALIGNMENT
ANTENNA SIZE
SEND ON HSB
4 ft., 6ft (onlyif anopen array 4 ft.
scanner is connected)
ON, OFF
ON
EBL Display
The mode of the bearing data displayed for Electronic Bearing Lines
(EBLs). The bearing information can be displayed in either of two forms:
• Relative: The bearing relative to your vessel’s heading.
• Mag/True: The actual bearing in either degrees magnetic or degrees true.
This option is only available if you are obtaining data from a compass.
If you choose this mode, the selection you made for Bearing Mode
determines whether °M or °T is displayed in the EBL data boxes. The
current units are shown for the heading value in the status bar at the top
of the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-13
Timed Transmission Option
The TIMED TRANSMIT parameter, together with the TX PERIOD and
STANDBY PERIOD parameters, controls the radar’s timed transmission
power-saving mode.
When TIMED TRANSMIT is set to ON, the scanner performs the number of
scans specified by TX PERIOD and then shuts down for the number of min-
utes specified by STANDBY PERIOD. While it is shut down, the scanner does
not rotate, and the display is in stand-by.
Set the TIMED TX parameter to OFF for normal operation. In this case, the
TX PERIOD and STANDBY PERIOD values are ignored.
Marks Options
You can select the mark symbol that will be used when you place a mark
(see Section 4.3).
If you turn the MARK DISPLAY option OFF, any marks you have placed are
hidden on the display, but retained in the marks database. You can turn the
option on again to display them at any time.
To clear all stored marks from the marks database, press the CLEAR MARKS
soft key, and the YES soft key to confirm the deletion.
Custom Scale
You can set up your own range scale. When switched ON, this is used
instead of the Pathfinder Plus Radar default range scale (see Section 3.2).
To set up a scale, press the SET RANGES soft key. The Custom Range Setup
Menu is displayed, which allows you to change the maximum range for
each range selection.
The following table lists the ranges, shows the factory default setting, and
provides a space for you to make a note of your new setting.
Table 7-3:
Radar Custom Range Scales
Range
Default Setting (nm)
New Setting (nm)
1
2
3
0.125
0.25
0.5
4
5
0.75
1.5
6
3.0
7
6.0
8
9
10
11
12.0
24.0*
48.0*
72.0*
* Maximum range depends on scanner type, refer to the Scanner Owner’s Handbook.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-14
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
To change the range scale, highlight the required range and use the soft
keys to change the value. Start at the top of the list and work down, since
each value must be greater than the value for the previous range in the list.
The following scale increments are available:
Table 7-4:
Radar Range Scale Increments
Range Scales (nm)
0.125 to 0.5
Scale Increments (nm)
0.125
0.25
0.5
0.5 to 3.0
3.0 to 6.0
6.0 to 24.0
2.0
24 to maximum for scanner
4.0
When you have finished setting up the new scale, press ENTER to return to
the Radar Set Up Menu, and press the ON soft key to select your new
scale.
Bearing Alignment
The bearing alignment is normally set when you first install your system,
and is described in Radar System Checks and Adjustments on page 8-17.
The bearing alignment corrects for display azimuth error. It can be set to a
value in the range -180° to +179.5°, in increments of 0.5°.
Antenna Size
This option is used to specify the size of an open array scanner. Refer to the
Pathfinder Scanner Owner’s handbook for further details.
Send on HSB
SEND ON HSB can be used to stop radar data being transmitted on hsb2.
If SEND ON HSB is set to OFF, you can view your radar data on the master
display, but not on a repeater display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-15
7.5 MARPA Set Up Parameters
The MARPA set up menu provides options to specify the target vectors, safe
zone and target history display.
The following table lists the MARPA Set Up parameters and their options,
shows the factory default setting, and provides a space for you to make a note
of your new default setting. Each parameter is described in the following
subsections.
Table 7-5:
MARPA Set Up Parameters
Parameter
Options
Factory Default
New Default
TARGET VECTOR
TRUE
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
VECTOR LENGTH
30 SECS, 1 MIN, 3 MINS,
6 MINS, 12 MINS
3 MINS
0.5 nm
3 MINS
OWN VESSEL
SAFE ZONE
0.1 nm, 0.2 nm, 0.5 nm,
1.0 nm, 2.0 nm
TIME TO SAFE
ZONE
3 MINS, 6 MINS,
12 MINS, 24 MINS
SAFE ZONE RING
TARGET HISTORY
OFF, ON
ON
OFF, 0.5 MIN, 1 MINS,
2 MINS, 4 MINS
OFF
Target Vector and Predicted Position
The target vector can be True or Relative. True indicates the target’s true
course and speed over ground. If True vectors are selected, the vessel’s vector
is also shown. A Relative vector indicates the target’s course and speed
relative to your vessel.
The length of the vector is determined by the target predicted position after a
set time interval.
Safe Zone
The safe zone options are used to set the dangerous target alarm limits.
The safe zone is a ring, centred on your vessel, within which a target is
considered dangerous. A target can also be considered dangerous when it is
within a specified time of the safe zone. You can switch the safe zone on/off.
When the zone is on and a target is acquired, the safe zone ring is displayed.
Target History
Target history can be set to plot the targets’ previous position at specified
intervals. The four most recent position points are displayed. If True target
vectors are selected, then the four most recent vessel position points are also
displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-16
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
7.6 Advanced Settings
The ADVANCED SET UP option allows you to set up values for the following
three parameters that affect the fine-tuning of the radar. Advanced settings
are only available from the Master radar display (that is, the display con-
nected to the scanner).
Table 7-6:
Advanced Radar Set Up Parameters
Parameters Function
Slider Range
0m to 152.4m
0-preset maximum
0-255
Display timing Corrects for display range error
STC preset
Tune preset
Equalizes target levels across display
Allows adjustment of the tuning range
controlled by the TUNE control
Note: Under normal circumstances you will not need to adjust these settings,
as they are set automatically at the factory. If these parameters are set incor-
rectly the performance of the radar will be adversely affected. Access to the
menu is therefore via a hidden key press.
➤ To change the settings:
1. Press the MENU key to display the set up soft keys.
2. Press and hold the blank soft key directly to the right of the RADAR SET UP
soft key for 5 seconds. The Advanced Settings menu is then displayed.
3. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar to the required option.
4. Use the soft keys to increase or decrease the slider setting. As soon as you
start to adjust the setting, the menu page is cleared so that you can see the
effects of the adjustment on the radar picture, and the radar is set to 1/8nm
range.
5. Press ENTER to display the menu again.
6. Press CLEAR to return to the Menu soft keys, and CLEARagain to return to
normal operation.
➤ If required, youcanrecallthe factorydefaultsforthispage. To do so, move the
selection bar to the SCANNER RESET option, press the ADVANCED SETTING
RESET soft key, and press the YES soft key to confirm.
If you extended the inter-unit cable, you should have set the display timing
when you first installed your system, as described in Radar System Checks
and Adjustments on page 8-17.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-17
Under certain circumstances, it may be easier to adjust the display timing
with MBS (Main Bang Suppression) off; press the MBS soft key to toggle
the setting OFF. MBS is reset to ON automatically when you finish adjust-
ing the display timing.
STC Preset
The Sensitivity Time Control can be adjusted to equalise targets levels
across the display. The factory setting should provide an even display, but
if you find that targets are brighter or dimmer nearer the centre than at the
edge of the display, you can adjust this slider until the required display is
achieved.
Note: Caution should be observed when adjusting this parameter as poor ad-
justment can adversely affect auto gain and sea controls.
Tune Preset
The radar tuning is controlled either automatically or manually using the
TUNE control (see Tuning the Receiver on page 3-9). However, this only
controls a restricted range of tuning values. If the actual tuning peak falls
outside this range, you will need to adjust the Tune Preset slider to move
the controlled range over the tuning peak.
Press the INITIATE SET UP soft key to enable slider control, and adjust for
maximum image intensity.
If required, you can press the RESTORE PREVIOUS soft key to reset the Tune
Preset to the value before you pressed INITIATE SET UP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
7.7 Chart Set Up Parameters
The CHART SET UP option allows you to set up the chartplotter according to
your system configuration and your personal preferences.
The following table lists the Chart Set up parameters and their options, shows
the factory default setting, and provides a space for you to make a note of your
new default setting. Each parameter is described in the following subsections.
Table 7-7:
Chart Set Up Parameters
Parameter
Options
Factory Default
New Default
CUSTOMIZE CHART
PLOTTER MODE
See below for details
OFF, ON
OFF
CHART
ORIENTATION
NORTH UP, COURSE UP,
HEAD UP
NORTH UP
OBJECT
OFF, ON POINTS, ON ALL
ON ALL
INFORMATION
WAYPOINT SYMBOLS
OFF, ON
ON
ON
WAYPOINT NUMBERS OFF, OFF
DEFAULT WAYPOINT
SYMBOL
,
,
,
HEADING VECTOR
OFF, 3 MINS, 10 MINS,
INFINITE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
COG VECTOR
TIDE VECTOR
OFF, 3 MINS, 10 MINS,
INFINITE
OFF, 10 MINS, 1 HOUR,
INFINITE
RADAR/CHART
SYNCH
OFF, ON
DATUM SELECTION
POSITION OFFSET
WGS 84, LOCAL
SET UP, OFF/ON
WGS 84
OFF
This provides a list of chart options, enabling you to specify how the chart
features are displayed. Most options can be toggled between on, off and
custom - custom passes on/off control to the SCREEN soft keys (see
Customizing the Screen Presentation Options on page 2-13).
The following features can be set using Customize Chart, factory default
settings are shown in bold type:
• chart text (on, off, custom)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-19
• chart text size (small, normal, large)
• chart display (detailed, simple)
• chart boundaries (on, off, custom)
• spot soundings (on, off, custom)
• depth shading limit (set the limit)
• depth contours (on, off, custom)
• depth contour display (set the upper and lower limits)
• nav marks (on, off, custom)
• nav marks icon (international, US)
• light sectors (on, off, custom)
• caution and routing data (on, off, custom)
• marine features (on, off, custom)
• land features (on, off, custom)
• icon display (simple, detailed, custom)
The factory default for CUSTOM options is ON.
Plotter Mode
PlotterMode enablesyou to zoomintoa smallerarea, evenwhen nochartdata
is available for that scale. This allows you use the chartplotter functions at
large scales even when a chart card is not installed.
Chart Orientation
The chart orientation is normally North Up, but can be changed to Course Up
or Head Up if heading data is available. The orientation modes give the
following displays:
• North Up: The chart is displayed with north upwards. As you change
heading, the ship’s heading marker moves. This is the default mode, and is
the only mode available if there is no heading data.
• Course Up: The chart is stabilized and displayed with the currently
selected course upwards. If you select a new course, the picture rotates to
display the new course upwards.
The reference used for the Course Up depends on the information avail-
able. The first available in the following is used:
i. A locked heading over a SeaTalk connection
ii. The heading at the time Course Up was selected
To update the Course Up reference while Course Up is the current mode,
re-select Course Up from the set up menu.
• Head Up: The chart is displayed with the vessel’s current heading
upwards. As the heading changes the chart will rotate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-20
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Object Information
You can set Object Information ON ALL, ON POINTS or OFF to determine when
an object identification pop-up is displayed. When set to ON ALL, the
information pop up is displayed when the cursor is placed over any chart area
fortwo seconds. ON POINTS enablestheinformationpopup when the cursor is
placed over a displayed chart object and OFF disables the information pop up.
Waypoint Options
Waypoint Symbols controls whether or not the waypoints are shown on the
Chart display, with their appropriate symbols. The active waypoint, and
waypoints in the current route are always shown.
Waypoint Numbers controls whether or not the waypoint numbers are
shown for any waypoints in the current route.
Default Waypoint Symbol lets you select the symbol you want used for
waypoint display.
Vectors
Heading, Tide and Course Over Ground vectors can be displayed as a line
from your vessel. The length of the vector is determined by your choice of
SOG and the time period. An infinite vector extends to the edge of the chart
screen.
Heading Vector indicates your current heading.
COG Vector indicates your course over ground.
Tide Vector indicates the tide angle. Tide information is calculated from the
speed through water, compass and position data.
Radar/Chart Synch
If you have a combined radar/chartplotter display you can select Radar/Chart
Synch ON or OFF. When set ON with chart and radar windows displayed, FIND
SHIP can be used to synchronize the radar and chart images.
The chart is redrawn so that its center matches that of the radar display. The
radar is redrawn to the scale and heading mode of the chart.
Datum Selection
You can select either WGS 84 or LOCAL datum. In LOCAL mode, you are
presented with a list of datums; use the trackpad to scroll through the list, then
press ENTER to select the option and close the menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Setting Up the System Defaults
7-21
CAUTION:
Changing the chart datum does not cause any waypoint or routes stored
in the chartplotter to move on the display, although their latitude and
longitude changes to reflect the new datum.
When adding waypoints numerically to the waypoint list, or via
SeaTalk,NMEA or hsb2, it is important that they are referenced to the
same datum to which the display is currently set.
When you change datum selection, the system attempts to set any connected
GPS to the new mode, using SeaTalk and NMEA set up commands. A
message shows whether the set up was successful or not.
Position Offset
You can offset the vessel position to allow for differences between the GPS
and paper chart data. This may be useful if you are using a datum that is not
available on the Chartplotter, or if you are referring to a paper chart drawn to
unknown datum.
You can change the offset by moving the cursor to the known vessel position.
This offset is applied to all incoming position data. The default offset value is
zero.
When position offset is switched on, all displayed vessel position data is
annotated (C) to indicate it has been corrected.
➤ To switch the position offset on/off:
1. Select the POSITION OFFSET option, then press the OFFSET OFF ON soft key
to toggle the option on/off. The last selected offset value is added to posi-
tion data and the vessel is displayed at the corrected position.
➤ To set a new offset value:
1. Select the POSITION OFFSET option, then press the SET UP OFFSET soft key.
If necessary, position offset is automatically toggled on.
2. Usethe trackpadto movethecursorto the requiredvesselposition; the cur-
sor position is displayed in a position offset data box.
3. Press the ACCEPT OFFSET soft key, the vessel is displayed at the new posi-
tion. Press ENTER to return to the default display.
➤ To set the offset value to zero:
1. Select the POSITION OFFSET option, then press the SET UP OFFSET soft key
2. Press the CANCEL OFFSET soft key. The position offset value is set to zero.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-22
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-1
Chapter 8: Installation
8.1 Introduction
This chapter provides installation instructions for your hsb2 series LCD
display. Simple systems such as that in Figure 8-1 below, or integrated
LCDdisplay and connecting the equipment are included.
• To install a single hsb2 series display unit follow the instructions in
Ifthisdisplayisaradarunit, youshouldthentestthedisplayasdescribedin
Section 8.7.
Section 8.8 and Section 8.9, taking particular care to ensure the correct
polarity of the SeaTalk supply.
• To install multiple displays, install the first display and any other equip-
ment, then test the system as described in Section 8.2 to Section 8.9. You
can then install additional displays.
• Details on installing the scanner are provided in the Pathfinder Plus
Radar Scanner Owner’s Handbook.
Scanner
Display Unit
GPS
Junction
Box
SeaTalk
Compass
Distribution Panel
NMEA
12/24V Supply
12V Supply
12V Supply
D4288-2
Figure 8-1: Typical System - Single Display Unit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Note: If you wish to practice using the display before installation, connect a
12V or 24V DC power supply (connecting the red wire via a 6.3A quick blow
fuse to positive and the black wire to negative) and using the simulator mode,
as described in Chapter 2.
Forfullfunctionalityoftheradarandchartplotteryouneedtoprovideposition
and heading data.
• Orientation - heading data is required for the radar to operate in North Up
and Head Up mode and the chart to operate in Course Up and Head Up.
• MOB requires heading and speed data. Alternatively, SOG and COG
(derived from the same source as position data) enable the MOB function.
vided if SOG and COG are also available.
• Position data is required for full functionality of the chart display.
Full details of heading, position and other data are given in Section 8.8.
Planning the Installation
• Location of the display unit, as described in Section 8.3.
• Cable Runs, including cables for an integrated system (to provide heading
and position data etc.), as described in Section 8.4.
EMC Installation Guidelines
All Raymarine equipment and accessories are designed to the best industry
standards for use in the recreational marine environment.
Their design and manufacture conforms to the appropriate Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) standards, but correct installation is required to ensure
thatperformanceis notcompromised. Althougheveryefforthasbeentaken to
ensurethattheywillperformunderallconditions, itisimportanttounderstand
what factors could affect the operation of the product.
The guidelines given here describe the conditions for optimum EMC
performance, butitisrecognizedthatitmaynotbepossibletomeetallofthese
conditions in all situations. To ensure the best possible conditions for EMC
performance within the constraints imposed by any location, always ensure
the maximum separation possible between different items of electrical
equipment.
For optimum EMC performance, it is recommended that wherever possible:
• Raymarine equipment and cables connected to it are:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-3
• At least 3 ft (1 m) from any equipment transmitting or cables carrying
radio signals e.g. VHF radios, cables and antennas. In the case of SSB
radios, the distance should be increased to 7 ft (2 m).
• More than 7 ft (2 m) from the path of a radar beam. A radar beam can
normally be assumed to spread 20 degrees above and below the radiat-
ing element.
• The equipment is supplied from a separate battery from that used for
engine start. Voltage drops below 10 V, and starter motor transients, can
causetheequipmenttoreset. Thiswillnotdamagetheequipment, butmay
cause the loss of some information and may change the operating mode.
• Raymarine specified cables are used. Cutting and rejoining these cables
can compromise EMC performance and must be avoided unless doing so
is detailed in the installation manual.
• If a suppression ferrite is attached to a cable, this ferrite should not be
removed. If the ferrite needs to be removed during installation it must be
reassembled in the same position.
Suppression Ferrites
The following illustration shows typical cable suppression ferrites used with
Raymarine equipment. Always use the ferrites supplied by Raymarine.
D3548-4
Figure 8-2: Typical Suppression Ferrites
Connections to Other Equipment
If your Raymarine equipment is to be connected to other equipment using a
cable not supplied by Raymarine, a suppression ferrite MUST always be
attached to the cable near to the Raymarine unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
8.2 Unpacking and Inspecting the Components
Unpack your system carefully, to prevent damage to the equipment. Save the
carton and packing, in case you need to return a unit for service.
Checkthatyouhaveallthecorrectsystem components. Thesedependonyour
system package, as follows:
Table 8-1:
Parts and Accessories
Item
Part No
Supplied with:
Option for:
7” LCD Display
E52031
E52032
E32034
RL70 PLUS
RL70RC PLUS
RC520 PLUS
-
-
-
LCD Display Accessories
7” Sun cover
D331
RL70/RL70RC/RC520 PLUS
Handbook, Radar/Chart
Quick Reference Card, Radar
Quick Reference Card, Chart
81186
86068
86057
RL70/RL70RC/RC520 PLUS
RL70/RL70RC PLUS
RC520 PLUS
7” Mounting bracket assy
Trunnion knobs (x2)
7” Flush Mount Kit
W143
W145
M92708
RL70/RL70RC/RC520 PLUS
All
-
-
-
All
Power cable
W144
All
-
Seatalk cable assembly -
Flat moulded plugs both ends:
3 ft 3 in (1 m) long
9 ft 9 in (3 m) long
16 ft 3 in (5 m) long
29 ft 3 in (9 m)) long
W284
W285
W286
W287
-
-
-
-
All
All
All
All
Flat to male round connector:
12 in (0.3 m) long
Flat to female round connector:
12 in (0.3 m) long
D187
D188
-
-
All
All
Flat moulded plug one end
only:
3 ft. 3 in (1 m) long
Ferrite for SeaTalk Cable
Seatalk junction 3-way block
Seatalk auxiliary junction box
D229
-
D244
R55006
-
All
-
All
-
-
All
-
hsb2 cable assy
3 ft 3 in (1 m)
10 ft (3 m)
R55001
R55002
R55003
R55004
E55010
E55040
R58117
-
-
-
-
-
-
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
-
20 ft (6 m)
30 ft (10 m)
60 ft (20m)
hsb2Splitter
In-line Terminator
NMEA OUT cable assy
4 ft 11 in (1.5m)
R55005
All
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-5
8.3 Selecting the Display Unit Location
The display unit can be mounted using the mounting bracket supplied, or
console mounted using the optional flush-mounting kit.
The dimensions of the display units, including the bracket, is shown in
Figure 8-3 .
When planning the display installation, the following should be considered to
ensure reliable and trouble free operation:
• Convenience: Powertheunitandselectasuitablemountinglocationprior
to installing the display.
The mounting location should be easily accessible to allow operation of
the front panel controls.
• Access: There must be sufficient space behind the display to allow cable
connections to the rear panel connectors, avoiding tight bends in the cable.
• Interference: The selected location should be far enough away from
devices that may cause interference, such as motors, generators and radio
transmitter/receivers (see the EMC guidelines earlier in this section).
magnetic compass.
• Cableruns:ThedisplayunitmustbelocatednearaDCpowersource. The
power cable supplied is 4.9 ft. (1.5m), but a longer cable can be used if
required: refer to Section 8.4.
The maximum length of cable between a master display and the scanner
unit should not normally exceed 60 ft. (20 m). If you need to use a longer
cable, refer to the Pathfinder Radar Scanner Owner’s Handbook.
• Environment: Do not restrict airflow at the rear of the display unit;
the display incorporates Cold Cathode Florescent Lamps (CCFL),
which have a reduced light output when the unit is very hot.
Ensure there is adequate ventilation, particularly if the display unit is
pod-mounted.
The display should be protected from physical damage and excessive
vibration. Although the display unit is waterproof, it is good practice to
mount it in a protected area away from prolonged and direct exposure to
rain and salt spray.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-7
8.4 Cable Runs
Consider the following before installing the system cables:
• You need to attach the power cable and the scanner cable. Additional
cables will be required if you are installing an integrated system.
• All cables should be adequately secured, protected from physical damage
and protected from exposure to heat. Avoid running cables through bilges
or doorways, or close to moving or hot objects.
• Acute bends must be avoided
• Where a cable passes through an exposed bulkhead or deckhead, a water-
tight feed-through should be used.
• Secure cables in place using tie-wraps orlacing twine. Coil any extra cable
and tie it out of the way.
You need to run the following cables:
• Power/NMEA Input cable, supplied with the display unit. This has acon-
nector plug at one end for connecting the display unit, and 7 wires at the
otherend for connecting the powersupply and optional NMEA inputs (see
Section 8.8, Integrated Systems).
CAUTION:
Do not pull the cable through the bulkheads using a cord attached to the
connector. This could damage the connections.
• Inter-unitcable, suppliedwiththescannerunit. ThisisVinyl-coveredand
shielded,withaconnectorplugatoneendforconnectingtothedisplayunit
or extension cable.
• SeaTalk cable, optional, with SeaTalk connector(s) at one or both ends.
•
hsb2 cable, required for multi-display systems.
• NMEA Output cable, optional, with an NMEA OUT connector at one
end only.
Power Cable
The display system (i.e. with a scanner connected where applicable) is
intended for use on ships’ DC power systems rated as follows:
12 V or 24 V systems
Radome Scanner System
12 V, 24 V or 32 V systems 4 kW Open Array Scanners System;
RC520
24 V or 32 V systems
10 kW Open Array Scanners System
A 5 ft. (1.5 m) power cable is supplied for connecting the ship’s DC power to
the display unit. Longer power cable runs may require larger wire gauges to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
minimise any voltage drop in the cable. The scanner type and the length and
typeoftheinter-unitcablealsoaffectthewiregaugerequiredfortheextension
power cable. For further detailson themaster display powercable length refer
to the Pathfinder Plus Radar Scanner Owner’s Handbook.
Ifalongerpowercablerunisrequired, usethesuppliedpowercabletoconnect
to the display unit. Then use a suitable connector block to connect the free end
to the extension cable, taking particular care to ensure correct polarity. The
2
supplied power cable has a cross-section of 2.0 mm .
Note: For repeater displays, the power cable may be extended by up to 20 m
using a wire gauge of 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) or greater, irrespective of the inter-
unit cable length.
Inter-Unit Scanner Cable
The inter-unit (scanner) cable entrance is at the rear of the scanner unit. If the
unitismounted on ahollow mastthecablemayberuninsidethemastandthen
fed through the radar’s cable entrance. Make sure that the cable does not chafe
where it enters the mast.
Note: Route the cable from the display up to the scanner, since this will re-
quire the smallest clearance hole.
The type of inter-unit cable, for connecting the scanner to the display unit,
depends on your scanner package. Refer to the Pathfinder Plus Radar
Scanner Owner’s Handbook for details, which include length considerations
and bending radii.
hsb2 Cable
The number of hsb2 (PLUS) display units that can be connected is limited by
the total cable length.
For example:
10 units
8 units
Max. total cable length - 40 m
Max. total cable length - 60 m
Note: If you have fewer displays, it may be possible to have more than 60 me-
tres of cable and conversely, if your total cable length is less than 40 metres, it
may be possible to connect more hsb2 displays. Contact you authorized Ray-
marine dealer for further details.
CAUTION:
Do notcut norrejoin the HSB cable - this will resultin signaldegradation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-9
8.5 Mounting the Display Unit
The display unit is waterproof to CFR46 and can be installed either above or
below deck. The display unit can be mounted using the mounting bracket
supplied, or console mounted using the optional flush-mounting kit (see
Section 8.2).
Mounting Bracket
The display unit can be mounted on a dash, chart table, bulkhead or deckhead.
Figure 8-4: LCD Display Mounting
1. Loosen the knobs and remove the mounting bracket from the display unit.
2. Mark the locations of the mounting bracket screw holes on the mounting
surface.
3. Use the screws supplied to attach the mounting bracket at the marked loca-
tions.
4. Attach the display unit to the mounting bracket, adjust the display angle
and tighten the knobs.
Console Mounting
The display unit can be console mounted if required, using the optional flush-
mounting kit (M92708).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
CAUTION:
Make sure there are no hidden electrical wires or other items behind the
location before proceeding. Make sure there is sufficient rear access for
mounting and cabling.
1. Check the selected location for the unit. A clear, flat area at least 9 in
(230 mm) wide by 8¼ in (210 mm) high, with at least 6 in (152 mm) of
clearance behind the panel, is required.
2. Unpack the flush-mounting kit.
3. Using the supplied template, trace out the display unit opening.
4. Drill a ½ in (12.7 mm) pilot hole in each corner of the cut-out area.
5. Using a suitable saw, cut along the inside edge of the cut-out line.
6. Remove the mounting bracket knobs and bracket from the display unit.
Make sure that the unit fits in the cut-out area.
If the optional screw fitting is required, drill four 3/16 in (5 mm) holes as
indicated on the template.
Screw the studs into the holes provided at the rear of the display.
7. Connect the DC power cable, inter-unit cable, and any other accessory
cables to the display. Avoid tight bends in the cables.
8. Place the gasket on the unit and slide the unit into the panel cut-out.
9. Use the flush-mounting kit to secure the unit to the console.
Alternatively, place a spacer over each of the four studs and secure with
the thumb nuts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-11
8.6 System Connections
Grounding the System
It is important that an effective RF ground is connected to the system. You
must ground the display by connecting the drain wire (shield) of the Power/
NMEA Input cable to the ship’s RF ground; a single ground point should be
used for all equipment.
If you need to extend the wire, the extension wire should be an 8 mm braid or
2
AWG 10 (6.0 mm ) multi-stranded cable.
If your vessel does not have an RF system, connect the drain wire to the
negative battery terminal.
DC Power Connection
Thedisplay isintended foruseonships’DC powersystems rated at12 V, 24 V
or 32 V. However, the operating voltage of the radar and radar/chartplotter
displays is limited by the scanner to which it is connected as follows:
12 V and 24 V systems
12 V, 24 V or 32 V
Radome Scanner System
4 kW Open Array Scanner System;
RC520
24 V or 32 V
10 kW Open Array Scanner System
The power connection to the display should be made at either the output
of the battery isolator switch, or at a DC power distribution panel.
Raymarine recommends that power is fed directly to the display via its
own dedicated cable system and MUST be protected by a thermal circuit
breaker or fuse, installed close to the power connection.
The DC system should be either:
• Negative grounded, with the negative battery terminal connected to the
ships ground.
• Floating, with neither battery terminal connected to the ships ground.
CAUTION:
This system is not intended for use on “positive” ground vessels.
The power cable Ground (earth) connections must be connected to the
ship’s ground as described above.
Power for External Equipment
External equipment cannot be powered from the display’s SeaTalk
interface.
It must be powered from the ship’s supply or via a SeaTalk bus.
Refer to Section 8.8 for further details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-12
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Display Unit Connection
The rear of the display provides the following connection sockets:
• Scanner (antenna) connection
hsb2,in/outconnectorfor connectingtoanother hsb2 orHSB seriesdisplay.
•
• SeaTalk, for SeaTalk data input and output and connecting to another hsb2
series display (such as a chartplotter or second radar display).
• NMEA Output, for NMEA data output in an integrated system.
• Power/NMEA Input, for 12 V, 24 V or 32 V DC power connection, two
NMEA 0183 inputs and one RF ground (screen) connection.
To NMEA instruments
To SeaTalk
instruments/GPS
POWER/NMEA
TRANSDUCER
SeaTalk
NMEA
OUT
R
G
Y
HSB
To other hsb2 displays
To radar scanner unit
NMEA IN 1
NMEA IN 2
POWER IN
D5576-1
The following sections detail the display unit connectors used when installing
a single hsb2 series display. The remaining connector details are provided in
Section 8.8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-13
Scanner Connection (master displays)
Connecttheinter-unitcableplugtotherearscannerconnector. Ifyouareusing
an inter-unit extension cable, connect this to the display unit, and connect the
supplied cable to the extension cable.
Thescannerconnector pinsareshowninthefollowing diagram, together with
the connections and core colours.
Front view of
Display Cable Connector
2
1
5
3
9
Refer to Pathfinder Scanner Owner's
Handbook for connector detail.
4
7
8
6
11
10
13
12
Display
Scanner
White
Black
Black
Orange
Black
Green
Yellow
Shield
Red
White
Black
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Video
Video
1
Video Rtn
Tx Trigger +
Tx Trigger --
Data I/O +
Data I/O --
Azimuth +
Azimuth --
Video RTN
2
*Battery --ve
Tx Trigger +
Battery --ve
Data I/O +
3
4
5
6
Violet
Grey
Tx Trigger --
7
8
Battery +ve
Data I/O --
*Battery +ve
Azimuth +
Azimuth --
9
Blue
Red
Battery +ve
*Battery +ve
*Battery --ve
Battery --ve
10
11
12
13
Red
Red
Violet
Grey
Black
Black
Battery +ve/--ve = 12, 24 or 32v.
* Not present on 'light', 11 core cables.
D4290B-2
Figure 8-6: Radar Scanner Connection
The hsb2 cable is supplied with a blanking plug for the scanner connector
socket. This should be attached to the repeater display. If the repeater display
is installed in an exposed position seal the blanking plate with silicon
compound.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-14
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
The DC power and NMEA input should be connected at the rear Power/
NMEAseven-pinconnector. Theconnector(viewedfromtheoutside)andpin
functions are shown in the following diagram and table. The NMEA Input is
detailed in Section 8.8.
f
2
5
7
6
1
4
3
Pin No. Function
Color
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Channel 1 NMEA data input (+ve)
Orange
Yellow
Channel 1 NMEA return (-ve)
Battery negative
Black
Shield (drain wire)
No insulation
Battery positive (12/24/32 V systems) Red
Channel 2 NMEA data input (+ve)
Channel 2 NMEA return (-ve)
Green
Blue
Figure 8-7: Power and NMEA Connector
Power Connection
CAUTION:
If the power connections are accidentally reversed the system will not
work. Use a multimeter to ensure that the input power leads are
connected for correct polarity.
Switch off the display unit before you remove the power cord.
The RED wire must be connected to the feed from the positive (+) battery
terminal and the BLACK wire to the feed from the negative (–) battery
terminal. The shielded wire (screen) should be connected to the ship’s RF
ground as previously described in Grounding the System on page 8-11.
Any unused wires should be insulated and taped back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-15
8.7 Radar System Tests and Installation Alignment
Once you have installed your Pathfinder Plus Radar System and made all the
connections, you need to check your installation and perform the System Tests
before using the system for navigation. It is strongly recommended that the
SystemTests are performed before connecting the radar to other equipment in
an integrated system. If you have extended your inter-unit cable, you will also
need to check the display timing. If you encounter any problems, refer to
Chapter 9.
You may wish to read Chapters 2 to 4, and familiarise yourself with the
operation of the system, before performing the initial set up and alignment.
System Check
Before performing the functional test, check the following:
• All securing bolts are fully tightened and mechanical locking arrange-
ments as specified are in place.
• Scanner and power connections have been made.
On the open array scanner, set the power switch (on the pedestal) ON.
• All connecting wires are secured and protected as necessary.
Note: If you are the boat owner and have performed the installation yourself,
ask your authorised installation dealer to check the installation before going
to sea.
Switch On and Initial Setup
To switch on the display unit, press and hold the POWER key until the unit
beeps. Since the display is a radar master, the magnetron warm-up sequence
should start, after which the unit should enter Stand-by mode.
The display switches on in the last used mode. If it is necessary to change the
mode, press DISPLAY to show the Display pop-up. Press DISPLAY again, as
necessary, to select Radar mode, then press ENTER.
If necessary, adjust the lighting (see Changing the Lighting & Contrast on
page 2-6).
If required, change the default language settings as follows:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-16
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
1. Press the MENU key to display the setup soft keys.
SYSTEM
SET UP¬
RADAR
SET UP¬
MARPA
SET UP¬
D3640-3
2. Press the SYSTEM SET UP soft key.
The SYSTEM SET UP menu is displayed, listing the parameters and their cur-
rent settings. The complete list, which you can scroll down, is shown in the
following illustration.
SYSTEM SET UP MENU
DATA BOXES
BEARING MODE
CURSOR REFERENCE
CURSOR READOUT
DAY/NIGHT
TRUE
RELATIVE
RNG/BRG
RNG/BRG
ON
HELP
SOFT KEYS
ON
KEY BEEP
ON
MOB DATA
DR
MENU TIMEOUT PERIOD NO TIMEOUT
DISTANCE UNITS
SPEED UNITS
NAUTICAL MILES
KNOTS
DEPTH UNITS
METRES
TEMPERATURE UNITS
VARIATION SOURCE
CENTIGRADE
AUTOMATIC
BRIDGE NMEA HEADING ON
NMEA-OUT SET UP
CURSOR ECHO
DATE FORMAT
TIME FORMAT
TIME OFFSET
GPS SOG COG FILTER
COMPASS SET UP
LANGUAGE
DD/MM/YY
24 HOUR
UTC
MEDIUM
ENGLISH (US)
OFF
D3650-6
SIMULATOR
Figure 8-8: System Set Up Menu
3. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar down to the LANGUAGE option.
The soft key labels are updated.
4. Use the soft keys to highlight the required language.
5. Press ENTER to return to the setup soft keys.
6. Press CLEAR to return to the normal radar screen.
Radar System Checks and Adjustments
Whenthedisplayisconnectedtoascannerunityoushouldperformthechecks
and adjustments detailed below.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-17
Transmission Check
WARNING:
The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy. Ensure that the
scannerhasbeeninstalledaccordingtotherecommendationsgiveninthe
PathfinderPlusRadarScannerOwner’sHandbook, andthatallpersonnel
are clear of the scanner, before switching to transmit mode.
Ensure the display unit is in Radar mode.
To switch to transmit mode, press and release the POWER key. The antenna
sweep should start to build up the radar picture.
Run through the operations described in Chapter 3 and check that all the
expected data is displayed.
Bearing Alignment
When the system is correctly installed, you must check the bearing alignment
to ensure that targets appear at their correct bearing relative to the ship’s bow,
and adjust the alignment if necessary.
To adjust the alignment, you need to select a visible target of known bearing
that is displayed on the radar, and then use the setup options to adjust the radar
until the correct bearing reading is obtained.
➤ To determine the alignment error, use one of the methods detailed below.
1. Visually identify a suitable target, such as a buoy that can be seen towards
the edge of the radar screen. Typically, this will be on the 1.5 nm range.
2. If the vessel is moored:
i. Determine the accurate bearing of the target relative to the ship’s bow
with the aid of a hand bearing compass. i.e. Subtract the ship’s head
bearing from the target visual bearing.
Example 1
Visual bearing= 065 °M
Ship’s head= 021°M
Relative bearing= 044°R
Example 2
Visual bearing = 030°M
Ship’s head= 042°M
Relative bearing= -012°(+360) = 348°R
ii. Measure the relative bearing of the target on the radar using an EBL.
iii. If there is a difference in the two bearings (alignment error), adjust the
radar as detailed below.
If the vessel is under way (in reasonably calm conditions):
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-18
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
i. Align the vessel’s bow to the target.
ii. Note the position of the target relative to the Heading marker.
iii. IfthetargetisnotundertheHeadingmarker, thereisanalignmenterror
and the radar can be adjusted as detailed below.
➤ To adjust the radar to eliminate the alignment error:
1. If a visual relative bearing of a target has been determined, as in 2.1 above,
set an EBL to this relative bearing.
2. Press the MENU key to display the setup softkeysand selectRADARSETUP.
RADAR SET UP MENU
EBL DISPLAY
RELATIVE
OFF
TIMED TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT PERIOD
STANDBY PERIOD
20 SCANS
10 MINS
DEFAULT MARK SYMBOL x
MARK DISPLAY
CLEAR MARKS
OFF
CUSTOM SCALE
BEARING ALIGNMENT
ANTENNA SIZE
SEND ON HSB
OFF
4 ft
ON
D3649-3
Figure 8-9: Radar Set Up Menu
3. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar on the Radar Set Up Menu to
BEARING ALIGNMENT.
4. Use the soft keys to adjust the Bearing Alignment slider and to rotate the
radar picture. As soon as you start the adjustment, the menu is cleared so
that the rotation of the picture can be seen. The keys can pressed and held,
to rotate the picture quickly, rather than in single steps.
5. Rotate the picture to place the target under the EBL, or Heading Marker,
depending on the method used to obtain the correct relative bearing.
6. When the bearing alignment error has been eliminated press ENTER to re-
display the Radar Set Up menu.
return to the normal radar screen.
8. After adjusting the radar, always check the bearing alignment at the next
opportunity. Usually the bow alignment to target is the most convenient
method, see If the vessel is under way (in reasonably calm conditions): on
page 8-17.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-19
Display Timing Adjustment
The display timing can be affected by the length of the cable used to connect
the scanner to the display unit. This in turn affects the short range accuracy
shown on the display. If you have extended (or reduced) your inter-unit cable,
you will need to check the display timing before using the system for
navigation.
1
Incorrect timing is most noticeable on the /8 nm or ¼ nm range scales. Targets
such as bridges or piers appear bent or bowed.
Note:Undernormalcircumstancesyoudonotneedtoadjustthesesettings, as
they are set automatically at the factory. If these parameters are set incor-
rectly the performance of the radar will be adversely affected. Access to this
menu is therefore via a hidden key press.
➤ To adjust for correct timing:
1
1. Select the /8 nm range.
2. On the radar locate a straight dock, seawall or bridge that is facing your
ship.Iftheimageisbentorbowed, asshowninthefollowingdiagram,then
you need to adjust the timing.
Own ship
Own ship
Own ship
Timing early
Timing late
Normal
D4009-2
Figure 8-10: Radar Display Timing
3. Press the MENU key to display the set up soft keys.
4. Press and hold the blank soft key directly to the right of the RADAR SET UP
soft key for 5 seconds. The Advanced Set Up menu is then displayed.
5. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar down to the Display Timing
option.
6. Use the soft keys to adjust the Display Timing slider. As soon as you start
the adjustment, the menu page is cleared so that you can see the effects of
1
the adjustment on the radar picture, and the radar is set to /8 nm range.
7. When the displayed image appears straight, press ENTER to return to the
Advanced Set Up soft keys.
8. Press CLEAR to return to the set up soft keys, and CLEAR again to return to
the normal radar screen.
Alternatively, you can use a VRM in conjunction with a target at a known
distance and adjust the picture so the target co-incides with the VRM.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-20
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
EMC Conformance
Always check the installation before going to sea to make sure that it is not
affected by radio transmissions, engine starting etc.
8.8 Integrated Systems
The hsb2 series displays can be linked to other equipment to transfer data as
follows:
• Additional displays, either CRT or LCD, can be connected via hsb2 (and
SeaTalk) to repeat fishfinder, chart and/or radar information at a remote
location.
• Data can be received via SeaTalk or NMEA, some of which will increase
the functionality of the display. Other data can be viewed on the display.
• Data can be transmitted via SeaTalk and NMEA to enhance other equip-
ment.
• Some incoming data can be converted across the communication link and
re-transmitted - see Data Conversion on page 8-30.
Power for External Equipment
External equipment cannot be powered from the display’s SeaTalk
interface. It must be powered from the ship’s supply or via a SeaTalk bus.
Ensure correct polarity of the SeaTalk connection.
For systems where the ship’s power source is 24 V only, you may need to
install a 24 V to 12 V DC converter. This is only necessary if the products
being connected to the display are:
• SeaTalk compatible (for example, compass, GPS and instruments), and
there is no existing SeaTalk bus
• NMEA compatible, but operate only from 12 V (for example, compass,
GPS and some navigators)
The DC~DC converter must conform to the following specification:
Table 8-2:
DC-DC Converter for External Equipment
Input
21 to 32 V DC
Output 13.6 V DC, isolated
Load
Continuous current rating, in excess of required load
hsb2™ (High Speed Bus) Multiple Display Systems
You can connect several hsb2 displays; the number is dependent on cable
length - see hsb2 Cable on page 8-8. The system can include existing HSB
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-21
display units that have been suitably upgraded - contact your authorized
Raymarine dealer for upgrade kit details.
The High Speed Bus (hsb2) provides extremely rapid transfer of data between
masterandrepeaterdisplays. Withanhsb2 andaSeaTalkconnectionmostdata
available can be controlled and displayed by any hsb2 unit in the system.
(Guard zones cannot be viewed or controlled on the chartplotter display, nor
on a repeater display that is not directly connected to a scanner. Likewise,
radar timed transmission is not available on a repeater display).
Master functionality is provided by the display with the appropriate
transducer connected as defined in Table 8-3 .
Table 8-3:
hsb2 Series Master Displays
Master Function
Display type
Transducer
Radar
R70/RCPLUS, RL70/C/RC/CRC PLUS
R80/RC PLUS, RL80/C/RC/CRC PLUS
Any Pathfinder PLUS Series
Scanner
Chart
RC520PLUS, RC530PLUS, RC631PLUS
R70RC PLUS, R80RC PLUS
Display includes a two-slot
chart cartridge
RL70RC/CRC PLUS, RL80RC/CRC PLUS
L755RC PLUS, L760/RC PLUS, L1250/RC
Fishfinder
L755RC PLUS, L760/RC PLUS, L1250/RC Fishfinder transducer
Any combination of hsb2 series displays is possible – each display could
provide different master functionality. Each display repeats the master
functionality of the other displays.
For example, you could connect an hsb2 Radar display and an hsb2 Fishfinder
display (which provides both fishfinder and chart functions), to enable you to
display and control radar, fishfinder and chart data on either or both displays.
You can display some combinations, such as radar/chart, in half-screen
windows.
hsb2 Connection
Each hsb2 display is supplied with an in-line terminator fitted to the HSB
socket. When connecting two displays via hsb2, plug the cable into the in-line
terminator on both displays.
When connecting more than two displays via hsb2 you must fit an hsb2 splitter
to at least one HSB socket. The splitter is fitted only to displays that are not at
the end of the chain, and when installing the splitter you must remove the in-
line terminator. Figure 8-11 illustrates the use of splitters and in-line
terminators in a multi-display system.
Thedisplaysmustalsobeconnected viaSeaTalk(seeSeaTalk®and NMEA In
on page 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-22
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Note:Thehsb2 cableshaveferriteclampsattachedateachendtoensureEMC
conformance. The cables are available in lengths of 1, 3, 6, 10 and 20 m.
.
RL80C Plus
R70 Plus
RL70C Plus
RL70 Plus
Se
Hk
P
ANTENNA/
TRANSDUCER
SeaTalk
DISPLAY
FUSE
hsb2
Splitter
hsb2
Splitter
hsb2
In-line
terminator
hsb2
In-line
terminator
hsb2 /HSB cable
hsb2 /HSB cable
hsb2 /HSB cable
Power
Power
Power
Power
hsb2 Multi Display Connection
D5577-1
Figure 8-11: Multi-display connections
HSB connector
HSB connector
Pin
Pin name
CGND
Function
Screen
1
2
3
HSVB_POS
HSVB_NEG
SeaTalk HSB
SeaTalk HSB
Pin 1, screen
Pin 3, blue
Pin 2, white
1
Rear of Display Unit
HSB
2
3
D4253_2
Figure 8-12: hsb2 Connector
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-23
®
SeaTalk and NMEA In
The display can receive a comprehensive range of data. The primary data is
described below:
Table 8-4:
Function of SeaTalk and NMEA Data
Data
Primary Uses
Suggested Source
Heading
Heading Modes
Autopilot,
MOB (if Speed data also available)
MARPA (radar)
Compass connected to SeaTalk bus
NMEA Compass*
Position
MOB(alsorequiresspeedandHDG SeaTalk GPS connected via Auxiliary JB
data)
Existing GPS Navigator via SeaTalk bus
Existing GPS (or Loran-C) navigator with
NMEA output
Position data in data box and Nav
Window
Waypoints & Marks
Own vessel position (chart)
Data Log (chart)
Waypoint Chart: Waypoint and route transfer Existing GPS Navigator via SeaTalk bus
Existing GPS (or Loran-C) navigator with
NMEA output
*Accurate heading data is required for MARPA, and it must be provided on
NMEA. We recommend the Pathfinder Smart Heading System (which
includes the Gyro Plus 2 unit) or a Raymarine autopilot system incorporating
a 150G or 400G Course Computer with internal rate gyro.
Heading data should ideally contain both magnetic and true heading. If only
one is available then variation needs to be provided either manually or
automatically - see Variation Source on page 7-8.
Some other radars and chartplotters can exchange their cursors via SeaTalk.
Locked heading should be used for Course Up if available via SeaTalk.
Otherdataconnected viaaSeaTalkbusorviaNMEAisgenerally displayed in
data boxes, e.g. depth, apparent wind angle and speed, time.
Note: The Raymarine Fishfinder uses its own depth data, rather than any oth-
er depth data on SeaTalk. If there is no other depth data on SeaTalk, Fishfind-
er depth is transmitted. If speed and temperature data are available on
SeaTalk the Fishfinder uses this data; if this data is not on SeaTalk from other
instruments, it is transmitted by the Fishfinder.
For details of received data refer to the table in Appendix D:SeaTalk and
NMEA Data Received and Transmitted. Examples of SeaTalk and NMEA
systems are shown in Figure 8-13 and Figure 8-14.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-24
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Scanner
GPS
2
2
2
hsb Series Display
hsb Series Display
hsb Series Display
NMEA
NMEA
NMEA
SeaTalk
hsb
SeaTalk
2
2
hsb
12/24V Supply
12/24V Supply
12/24V Supply
SeaTalk
Fluxgate
Compass
Course Computer (G series)
Distribution Panel
12/24V Supply
NMEA
SeaTalk
SeaTalk
SeaTalk
SeaTalk
Typical SeaTalk System
D5702-1
Figure 8-13: Integrated System with Repeater Display and SeaTalk Instruments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-25
Scanner
hsb2 Series Display
hsb2 Series Display
SeaTalk
hsb2
Distribution
Panel
GPS
NMEA Out
Non SeaTalk
Pilot
12/24V
Supply
NMEA
12/24V Supply
Gyro
Plus 2
Unit
NMEA
NMEA
12/24V Supply
SeaTalk
SeaTalk
D4287-3
Figure 8-14: Integrated System with Repeater Display and NMEA Instruments
SeaTalk
The SeaTalk standard was originally developed by Autohelm (part of
Raymarine), and allows compatible instruments to be connected by a single
cable carrying power and data in/out. This means that additional instruments
and functions can beadded to aSeaTalk system, simply bypluggingthem into
the network.
SeaTalk is a precise, high-speed, bi-directional protocol which is flexible
enough to adapt to any number of instruments, without a central processor.
SeaTalk equipment can also communicate with non-SeaTalk equipment via
the NMEA standard.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-26
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
SeaTalk Connection
This connection is necessary for full functionality between hsb2 series
displays. SeaTalk data, if present, is the primary source for all navigational
data except heading.
The SeaTalk input/output should be connected at the rear SeaTalk 3-pin
connector. This appears as follows, when viewed from outside:
SeaTalk In/Out
1. Red (No internal connection)
2. Screen (0V)
3. Yellow (Data)
D3232-3
Figure 8-15: SeaTalk Connector
Table 8-5:
Sea Talk Connections
Pin No.
Function
+12 V
0 V
Color
Red
1
2
3
Shield
Yellow
Data
Note:
1. IfyouusetheSeaTalkconnectoryoumustfitthesuppliedferritetothecable
for EMC CE conformance. The ferrite must be clipped to the cable as close to
the connector as possible.
2.Thedisplaydoesnotsupply12VviatheSeaTalkconnector, neitherdoesthe
SeaTalk connector require 12 V to operate.
12 V is required for other SeaTalk units (except where SeaTalk is connected
only between two hsb2 displays).
3. If you are connecting an active compass to the radar, the NMEA input has
priority. You should, therefore use an NMEA input channel (see Power and
NMEA Input Connection) rather than the SeaTalk interface, unless the com-
pass only has a SeaTalk output.
To connect the display unit to the SeaTalk bus, connect a standard SeaTalk
cable between the SeaTalk connector on the rear of the display and a SeaTalk
instrument or the SeaTalk bus. For multi-display systems, use a SeaTalk
Junction 3-way block (part number D244) at each display.
Standard SeaTalk cables are available in a range of lengths (part numbers
W284 to W287), and cables for connecting to SeaTalk units with round
connectors are also available (part numbers D187 or D188), see Section 8.2
for further details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-27
NMEA 0183
The NMEA 0183 Data Interface Standard was developed by the National
MarineElectronicsAssociationofAmerica. Itisaninternationalstandardthat
enables equipment from many different manufacturers to be connected
together and to share information.
The information is passed in “sentences”, each of which has a three-letter
sentence identifier. When you check to see if one item will “talk” to another,
make sure that the two items both use the same sentence identifiers. For
example: VTG carries Course and Speed Over Ground data; GLL carries
latitude and longitude; DBT carries water depth; MWV carries relative wind
angle and wind speed data.
TheNMEA 0183 standardcarriessimilarinformationtoSeaTalk. However, it
has the important difference that one cable will only carry information in one
direction. For this reason NMEA 0183 is generally used to connect a data
receiver and a transmitter together: for example, a compass sensor
transmitting heading to a radar, or a GPS sensor (or Chartplotter) transmitting
position and navigation data to a radar.
NMEA Input Connection
The two NMEA/Power input connectors are normally used for non-SeaTalk
Compass (heading) data or GPS. It can also be used for additional navigation
data (if not provided via SeaTalk).
Connect the input(s) to the orange and yellow wires (Channel 1) and/or the
green and blue wires (Channel 2). Refer to Power and NMEA Input
Connection on page 8-14 for further details.
For example, to connect a Raymarine Heading Sensor to the NMEA
Channel 1 input, connect the cables and power supply using a suitable
connector block, as shown in the diagram below. If installed, it may be
convenient to connect the power to the SeaTalk auxiliary junction box
described in the following section.
Red
+12 V
Yellow
+ NMEA Data (orange)
Black
-- NMEA Data (yellow)
0V
D3604-1
Figure 8-16: NMEA Input Connection
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-28
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Using the SeaTalk Auxiliary Junction Box
A junction box (provided with the radar/chart and chart displays; optional
with the radar displays) is used to connect the SeaTalk system to the display
unit. This junction box enables the SeaTalk bus, power and GPS to be
connected.
If power is not already available (via another SeaTalk instrument), the
junction box can be used to apply power to the SeaTalk bus for other
applications. The junction box may also be used for other purposes, e.g.
supplying power to a flux gate compass and routing the compass data to the
display NMEA In connection, or alternatively, for connecting a NMEA GPS
system.
The junction box includes:
• SeaTalk cable and connector to attach to display unit
• Power cable to connect to 12 V power (if required)
• Input connections to connect SeaTalk cable from external equipment
• Spare connections for another instrument
CAUTION:
Ensure correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying radar or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the
connections.
Figure 8-17 shows how to connect the junction box; Appendix B provides
connection details for specific GPS and Beacon Receiver systems.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-29
To GPS
Power Out: 1 & 2
Power In: 1 & 3
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
12V
Power
Supply
Spare
Input
Fused
Cable
Core
Black (screen)
Terminal
Function
0V
+12v
SeaTalk
0V
+12V
0V
+12V
SeaTalk
SeaTalk
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
Red
Yellow
Black (screen)
Red
Black (screen)
Red
Power
GPS
Yellow
D4291-1
Figure 8-17: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box
Data is transmitted in SeaTalk and NMEA formats as detailed in Appendix D
and can be used to enhance other equipment as required. You can disable the
transmission of individual NMEA output sentences - refer to NMEA Out Set
Up on page 7-9.
The SeaTalk input/output connection is detailed in SeaTalk Connection on
page 8-26.
The NMEA output connector is a 4-pin connector as illustrated below. The
1.5 m NMEA OUT cable has a ferrite clamp attached to ensure EMC
conformance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-30
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
NMEA OUT connector
NMEA OUT connector
Pin Pin name
Function
NMEA ground
NMEA data output
N/C
2
3
4
5
NMEA_GND
NMEA_SIG
N/C
Pin 2, white
Pin 5, screen
CGND
Screen
Pin 3, blue
Pin 4, not connected
*Pin 1 does not exist on this connector
3
2
Rear of display
NMEA out
5
4
D4254_1
Figure 8-18: NMEA Output Connector
Data Conversion
The displays convert some information across the communications links as
follows:
NMEA In to NMEA Out and SeaTalk
SeaTalk to NMEA Out
Thisenablesdatareceivedbythedisplaytobepassedtootherinstruments.For
example, if you have a master and a repeaterdisplay, you only need to connect
NMEA In to the master display, which will pass the data to the repeater via
SeaTalk.
You can prevent NMEA heading data being bridged onto the Seatalk bus -
refer to Bridge NMEA Heading on page 7-9.
Note: To transfer NMEA data, orto convert the data, the display mustbe pow-
ered On.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: Installation
8-31
8.9 Integrated System Checks
Chart Display - RL70 PLUS, RL70RC PLUS, RC520 PLUS
When you have connected your display unit to the required equipment ensure
that position data is available at the display via NMEA or SeaTalk.
To confirm your chartplotter is operating correctly, perform the following
checks:
1. Without a chart card installed, select the Chart display mode and select a
suitable range scale. Verify that the world map is visible.
Use the trackpad to check cursor movement and normal scrolling action.
2. To ensure that the display is responding to position data:
PressFINDSHIP, check the cursor is fixed onthevesselsymbolwhich is cor-
rectly positioned at the center of the chart display.
3. Insert a chart cartridge for the area of your vessel.
Use the RANGE key to zoom-in to check that the chart data is being dis-
played.
Received Data
If either SeaTalk or NMEA In is connected, verify that the expected data is
displayed.
1. Press DISPLAY and select the NAV DATA WINDOW ON.
Check that the expected data is displayed.
2. If heading data is connected, select Chart mode and check it is displayed in
the heading data box, or select Radar mode and check heading isdisplayed
in the Status Bar.
Transmitted Data
If SeaTalk or NMEA Out is being transmitted to other equipment, check that
the data is being received correctly.
An NMEA Out connector is used to transmit navigation data. The NMEA
Outputcableshouldbeconnectedtotheupper, leftconnectorontherearofthe
display unit.
Note: The NMEA Output cable has a ferrite clamp attached to ensure EMC
conformance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-32
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving
9-1
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem
Solving
This chapter provides information on routine maintenance and on possible
causes of problems you may experience with your display unit.
9.1 Maintenance
WARNING:
The display unit contains high voltage. Adjustments require specialized
service procedures and tools only available to qualified service
technicians - there are no user serviceable parts or adjustments and the
operator should not attempt to service the equipment. The operator
should not remove the rear cover of the display.
Switch off the display unit before removing the power cord.
Routine Checks
The display is a sealed unit. Maintenance procedures are therefore limited to
the following periodic checks:
• Wipe the display clean with a damp cloth (ensure power is off).
• Examine the cables for signs of damage, such as chafing, cuts or nicks.
• Check that the cable connectors are firmly attached.
EMC Servicing and Safety Guidelines
• Raymarine equipment should be serviced only by authorized Raymarine
service technicians. They will ensure that service procedures and replace-
ment parts used will not affect performance. There are no user serviceable
parts in any Raymarine product.
• Some products generate high voltages, so never handle the cables/connec-
tors when power is being supplied to the equipment.
• When powered up, all electrical equipment produces electromagnetic
fields. These can cause adjacent pieces of electrical equipment to interact
withoneanother, withaconsequentadverseeffectonoperation. Inorderto
minimise these effects and enable you to get the best possible performance
from your Raymarine equipment, guidelines are given in the installation
instructions, to enable you to ensure minimum interaction between differ-
ent items of equipment, i.e. ensure optimum Electromagnetic Compatibil-
ity (EMC).
• Always report any EMC-related problem to your nearest Raymarine
dealer. We use such information to improve our quality standards.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
• In some installations, it may not be possible to prevent the equipment from
being affected by external influences. In general this will not damage the
equipment but it can lead to spurious resetting action, or momentarily may
result in faulty operation.
9.2 Resetting the System
There are three types of reset available for the display:
• FactoryReset: Thisresetsallvaluesback to theiroriginalfactory settings.
CAUTION:
The factory reset clears the Marks database and the Waypoints and
Routes databases.
• Power-On Reset: When you turn the display off and on again, the screen
reverts to the chart or radar picture with all windows cleared.
• Picture Reset: Press and hold the DISPLAY key for two seconds to return
the screen to the full-screen picture of the top window with all windows
cleared.
At power-on, the last-used values are retained for all the options, except for
those listed in the following table which are reset to the factory default each
time.
Table 9-1:
Power On Default Settings
Item
Power-on setting
Heading Mode
Rain
Head Up
OFF (but value stored) – radar only
FTC
OFF (but value stored) – radar only
Alarm
ON, with last-used value
Zoom
OFF
Windows
Lighting & contrast )
OFF
Lighting 40%, contrast 50%
.
➤ To perform a factory reset:
1. Press MENU.
2. Press the SYSTEM SET UP soft key to display the System Set Up page (see
Section 7.3 for details).
3. Press and hold MENU for 5 seconds.
A countdown timer is displayed. If you release the MENU key before the
timer reaches zero, the reset is not performed.
When the reset request has been accepted, the system restarts.
The factory default settings are listed in Section 7.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving
9-3
9.3 Problem Solving
All Raymarine products are, prior to packing and shipping, subjected to
comprehensive test and quality assurance programs. However, if this unit
should develop a fault, please refer to the following table to identify the most
likely cause and the corrective action required to restore normal operation.
If you still have a problem after referring to the table below, contact your local
dealer, national distributor or Raymarine Technical Services Department for
further advice.
Always quote the product serial numbers. The display unit serial number is
printed on the back of the unit.
Common Problems and Their Solutions
Table 9-2:
Common Problems
Problem
Correction
Display does not function
1. Make sure that the power supply cable is sound and that
all connections are tight and free from corrosion.
2. Check the system fuse.
“Scanner not responding” message Check that the cable connecting the scanner to the radar
display unit is firmly attached and undamaged.
The bearing displayed on the radar
Perform the bearing alignment procedure described in
display is not the same as the actual Section 8.7, Radar System Tests and Installation Alignment
bearing.
Technical Support:
Please visit out website at:
www.raymarine.com/recreational/support
where you willfind aQuestions &Answersdatabase, serviceinformationand
e-mail access to the Technical Support department.
Alternatively, if you don’t have access to the world wide web, call:
1-800-539-5539 extension 2444 or
(603) 881-5200 extension 2444
Our Technical Support Specialists are available to answer questions about
installing, operating and trouble-shooting all Raymarine products.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
How to Contact Raymarine (US)
For Marine Product and Services Information
Visit the Raymarine World Wide Web site for the latest information on the
newest Raymarine electronic equipment and systems at:
www.raymarine.com
For Accessories and Parts
Many Raymarine accessory items and parts can be obtained directly from
your authorized Raymarine dealer. However, if you are in need of an item not
available from the retailer, please contact Raymarine Technical Services at:
1-800-539-5539 extension 2333 or (603) -881-5200.
Technical Service is available Monday through Friday 8:15 AM to 5:00 PM
Eastern Standard Time.
Please have the Raymarine item or part number ready when calling if placing
anorder. Ifyouare notsurewhichitemisappropriateforyourunit, youshould
first contact the Technical Support Department at:
1-800-539-5539 ext. 2444 or
(603)-881-5200 to verify your requirements.
For Product Repair and Service
In the unlikely event your Raymarine unit should develop a problem, please
contact your authorized Raymarine dealer for assistance. The dealer is best
equippedtohandleyourservicerequirementsandcanoffertimesavinghelpin
getting the equipment back into normal operation.
In theeventthatrepairscan notbeobtainedconveniently, productservicemay
also be obtained by returning the unit to:
Raymarine Product Repair Center
22 Cotton Road, Unit D
Nashua, NH 03063-4219
The Product Repair Center is open Monday through Friday 8:15 a.m. to
5:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time or Eastern Daylight Savings Time. All
products returned to the Repair Center are registered upon receipt. A
confirmation letter will be sent to you acknowledging the repair status and the
product’sreferencenumber. Shouldyou wishtoinquire abouttherepairstatus
of your unit, contact the Product Repair Center at:
1-800-539-5539
Please have the product reference number, or unit serial number, ready when
you call. We will do everything possible to make the repair and return your
unit as quickly as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving
9-5
How to Contact Raymarine (Europe)
In Europe, Raymarine support, service and accessories may be obtained
from your authorised dealer, or contact:
Raymarine Company
Anchorage Park, Portsmouth
PO3 5TD, England
Tel +44 (0)23 9269 3611
Fax +44 (0)23 9269 4642
Or visit the Raymarine World Wide Web site:
www.raymarine.com
Accessories and Parts
Raymarine accessory items and parts are available through your authorized
Raymarine dealer. Please refer to the lists of component part numbers and
optional accessories in the Installation chapter of this manual, and have the
Raymarine part number ready when speaking with your dealer.
Ifyouareuncertainaboutwhatitemto chooseforyourRaymarineunit, please
contact our Customer Services Department prior to placing your order.
Worldwide Support
Please contact the authorized distributor in the country. A list of worldwide
distributors is supplied with your system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Specification
A-1
Appendix A:Specification
hsb2 Series7" LCD Displays
General
Approvals:
CE - conform to
1999/5/EC, EN60945:1997
FCC - conforms to
Part 80 (47CFR) and Part 2 (47CFR)
223 x 204 x 75mm (8.8" x 8" x 3"), excluding bracket
1.2 kg(2.6lbs)
Size:
7”
Weight
Mounting
Power
Bracket with panel mount option
External 10.7 - 44 V DC required
Floating earth/fully isolated
10 W consumption with full backlighting
Environmental:
Op/Storage Temp. Range
Humidity limit
Waterproof to CFR46; suitable for external mounting
-10°C to +70°C
up to 95% at 35°C non-condensing
Controls
11 defined keys, 4 soft keys and trackpad
Cursor
Context sensitive, provides range/bearing or lat/lon
Display Type:
7" Film Super Twist Neumatic (FSTN) LCD, monochrome with
4 gray scales
Resolution:
320 x 240 (1/4 VGA)
Display Size 7"
LCD Contrast
7" diagonal - 143 mm x 111 mm
100 levels, selectable via soft keys.
Illumination
Day/Night Mode
Screen and keypad: 0 to 100 in 1% steps
Day and Night palettes available
Languages
UK English, US English, Danish, French, German, Dutch, Ital-
ian, Icelandic, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish,
Finnish
Connectors
13 pin scanner
3 pin hsb2 input/output
3 pin SeaTalk input/output
4 pin NMEA output
7 pin power including 2 NMEA input channels
Interfaces
1 x SeaTalk, receive and transmit
1 x hsb2, receive and transmit
1 x NMEA 0183, transmit
2 x NMEA 0183, receive
C-MAP cartridge reader - 2 slots
(RL70RC PLUS and RC520 PLUS)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Cursor Echo
Cursor Echo between radar and chart on split screen and/or
separate displays connected via SeaTalk.
Man Overboard
(MOB Mode)
Mark placed with course line; readout shows range, bearing,
lat/lon of MOB and time elapsed since MOB.
Screen Functions
Data Boxes
Full, half and quarter screens available dependent on function
Up to six user selectable information boxes
Radar Features
Range Scales (Range Rings) 0.125 (0.0625), 0.25 (0.125), 0.5 (0.125), 0.75 (0.25), 1.5 (0.25),
3 (0.5), 6 (1), 12 (2), 24 (4), 48 (8) or 72 (12) nm selectable (depen-
dent on scanner).
Performance limited by the scanner type and position.
Range scales can be customized
Range Ring Accuracy
Better than +/– 1.5% of the max. range scale in use,
or 22 m (72 ft.), whichever is the greatest.
Bearing Accuracy
+/– 1°
Variable Range Markers
Electronic Bearing Lines
Bearing Scale
2xVRMs, readout nm, kyds, sm, km
2xEBLs, floating if required, resolution 1°
360° graduated at 10° intervals
23 m (25 yds)
Minimum Range
Range Discrimination
Presentation Modes
23 m (25 yds)
Head up, Course up or North up (selectable True or Magnetic)
Relative or True Motion
Scanner Control
Interference rejection, standby/transmit modes, pulse selection,
Tune, Rain, FTC, and Sea controls, with selection of manual or auto-
matic control of gain, sea clutter and tune (Auto GST )
TM
Magnetic Sensor
Waypoint Navigation
Marks
NMEA or Seatalk
Lollipop symbol, WPT range, bearing, TTG or lat/lon readout
100 Mark database
MARPA
Manual acquisition of 10 targets, automatic tracking, dangerous
target alarms, safe zone, target history, true or relative vectors
Variation Source
Auto (SeaTalk/NMEA/Internal algorithm) or Manual
Guard Zone Alarm
2 guard zones, selectable sensitivity level, audible alarm
User selectable in split screen mode provided chart data available
Radar/Chart Synchroniza-
tion
Zoom Mode
x2, from 0.25 nm to maximum range, in 1/4 window
66% of radius (except maximum range)
Off Centre Function
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Specification
A-3
Display Windows
Radar, Chart, CDI, BDI and Navdata
Short, medium, long, off
Operator selectable
Wakes
Target Expansion
Timed TX
Rotation periods: 10, 20 or 30 scans
Repetition periods: 3, 5, 10 or 15 minutes
Chartplotter Features
Cartography
C-MAP® NT micro cartridges available from C-MAP®
Chart of the world built in
Display Windows
Chart Scaling
Chart, Radar, Data Log, BDI, CDI, Navdata
1/64 nm (if cartographic data is available) to 4000 nm
North up (selectable True or Magnetic) Head up or Course up
Presentation Modes
Waypoints
1000waypointsenteredviacursor, lat/lon, rangeandbearingfrom
present position or at vessels position.
16 character name can be assigned
Additional storage available on User Cartridges
hsb2, current route via Seatalk, NMEA
Waypoint Transfer
Routes
A route plan may contain up to 50 waypoints. Up to 20 routes can
be stored in the units internal memory
Additional storage available on User Cartridges
SmartRoute to create a route from a track history
Track History
5 tracks with up to 750 points in each can be stored in the units
internal memory.
Alarms
Programmable arrival, cross track error, anchor drift, position fix/
data loss warning, countdown timer and alarm clock
Navigation Information
Own ships position in Lat/Lon, XTE, TTG and SOG/COG selectable.
Mileagescaleruler.Bearinganddistancetowaypoint. Bearingand
distance to cursor, SeaTalk data (see ‘interfacing’ section)
Variation Source
Auto (SeaTalk/NMEA/Internal algorithm) or Manual
Chart/Radar Synchroniza-
tion
User selectable in split screen mode provided radar/chart data
available
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Interfacing
Fully independent use of remote Chart data if present on hsb2.
Full remote control and display of Radar data if present on hsb2
High Speed Bus
SeaTalk Input
Depth, Speed Over Ground & Course Over Ground, Position,
Waypoint number, range, bearing and time to go, Speed through
water, Time, Cross Track Error, Heading, Wind, Date, Log/Trip, Pilot
Status, Temperature, Man Overboard, and cursor position
NMEA Input
NMEA 0183 (GLL, GGA, GLC, GTD, VTG, BWC, BWR, RMA, RMB,
RMC, XTE, VHW, HDG, HDM, HDT, DBT, DPT, APB,VLW, MWV,
MTW,WPL, RTE and ZDA)
SeaTalk Output
Cursor data, Guard zone alarm and Navigational data bridged
from NMEA
NMEA Output
(User selectable)
APB, BWC, BWR,DBT, DPT,GGA, GLL, MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, RSD,
TTM, VLW, VHW, VTG, WPL, ZDA
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box
B-1
Appendix B:Using the Auxiliary Junction
Box
The SeaTalk Auxiliary Junction Box is used to connect SeaTalk GPS and
Differential beacon receivers to your display.
Note: With the exception of the Raystar 114, when you use the following Dif-
ferential Beacon Receiver configurations, the receiver must be set to AUTO
MODEintheGPSSet-Uppage. Manualselectionswillnotbeaccepted. Refer
to Chapter 6 for details.
The recommended method of providing position, course over ground and
speed over ground information to the displays is by connection to a SeaTalk
GPS. The chartplotter and radar/chartplotter displays are supplied with an
Auxiliary Junction Box, whose main purpose is to make this connection
easier. The junction box has two flying leads, one with a SeaTalk plug for
connection to the display and the other lead is for connection to a 12V power
supply (the display does not provide power for the GPS).
The following sections detail the connections to the Auxiliary Junction Box
for several different types of GPS, including a beacon receiver if installed.
Except for Raystar 114, the differential beacon receivers used are Raymarine
NRD-2A, Apelco BR101 and the Autohelm Beacon Receiver.
The connections detailed in the following sections ensure that the GPS will
always operate in SeaTalk mode. Note that the Raystar 112LP must be the
SeaTalk version.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Raystar 112, 105, Apelco 182 and 182XT
In order to connect your GPS to your display, you must first cut off the 6-pin
connector and strip back the insulation on all the wires. Connect to the
Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the first illustration below.
To connect your Differential Beacon Receiver, you must cut off the 5-pin
connector (Raytheon and Apelco versions), strip back the insulation on all the
wires and connect to the Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the second
illustration below.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the
connections.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
Red
Yellow
From
GPS
Black
12V
Power
Green sensor
White
Brown
Supply
Red
(fused)
D4294-3
Black
Red
Yellow
From
GPS
Green sensor
White
Brown
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused)
Red
Black
Red
From
the
DBR
Yellow
White
Green
D4295-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box
B-3
Autohelm GPS, Z260 and Z273
To connect your GPS to your display connect the wires as shown in the first
illustration below.
To connect your Differential Beacon Receiver, you must cut off the 5-pin
connector (Raytheon and Apelco versions) strip back the insulation on all the
wires and connect to the Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the second
illustration below.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the
connections.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
Red
Green
From
GPS
Black
12V
Power
Yellow sensor
White
Brown
Supply
Red
(fused)
D4297-3
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Brown
From
GPS
sensor
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused)
Red
Black
Red
Yellow
White
Green
From
the
DBR
D4298-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Raystar 112LP (SeaTalk version)
To connect your Raystar 112LP to your display, refer to the first illustration
below or follow the instructions in Chapter 8.
To connect the Raystar 112LP and your Differential Beacon Receiver, cut off
the 5-pin connector and strip back the red, black and green wires. Remove the
sleeve from the end of the Raystar 112LP cable to expose the green and brown
wires, then connect to the Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the second
illustration below.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the
connections.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Screen
Red
From
GPS
sensor
Yellow
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused)
Red
D4292-3
Screen
Red
Yellow
From
GPS
Green sensor
Brown
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
12V
Power
Supply
Red
(fused)
Black
White
Red
From
the
Green DBR
Yellow
D4296-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box
B-5
Raystar 114 Combined GPS and Differential Beacon
Receiver
To connect your Raystar 114 Combined GPS and Differential Beacon
Receiver to your display, cut off the 5-pin connector, strip back the insulation
on all the wires and connect to the Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the
illustration below.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the
connections.
Note: You can usethe GPS Set-Uppage to manually tune the Raystar114. Re-
fer to Chapter 6 for details.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
White
Red
Yellow
From
Combined
GPS/DBR
sensor
Green
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused)
Red
D4301_1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Raystar 120 WAAS Satellite Differential Receiver
To connect your Raystar 120 WAAS Satellite Differential Receiver to your
display, connect to the Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the illustration
below. Optional connections to RTCM are also shown. Note that the green
wire is not used.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the
connections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features
C-1
Appendix C:C-MAP Chart Card Features
TheC_MAP chartcardsdisplay cartographicfeatures which arederivedfrom
a library of symbols. The library includes a set of 16 x 16 pixel bitmaps which
provide realistically shaped icons for many chart objects. However, these
complexicons can overlap and clutterthedisplay at somescales, soitpossible
for the user to select smaller, simple icons. Some chart objects are represented
by text; in such cases conventional abbreviated text is used, for example, M –
mud, R – rock, Wk – wreck
Thechartplottersetupmenuprovidesthesub-menuCUSTOMISECHART,which
lets you determine how chart features are displayed. You can set the icon
display of many features to custom; you then use the CUSTOM soft key to
switch the customized icons off/on. The factory default for the CUSTOM
options is on.
The chart features controlled from the Customize Chart menu are grouped as
detailed below, some groups are sub-divided into categories
Menu Option
Chart Features
Names
CHART TEXT
CHART BOUNDARIES
SPOT SOUNDINGS
DEPTH SHADING LIMIT
DEPTH CONTOURS
Chart Boundaries
Spot Soundings
Reference Depth
Depths (Bathymetric Lines)
Depth Labels
DEPTH CONTOUR DIS-
PLAY
Depth Contour
Range
NAV MARKS
Lights:
Buoys and Beacons:
Signals
Light;
Buoy, cardinal
Anchor
Light moire’ effect;
Light float;
Light vessel
Buoy, installation
Buoy, isolated danger
Buoy, lateral
Cairn
Chain/Wire
Fog signal
Buoy, safe water
Buoy, special purpose
Buoy, generic
Beacon, cardinal
Beacon, isolated dan-
ger
Beacon, lateral
Beacon, safe water
Beacon, special pur-
pose
Radar reflector
Top mark
Nav aid, generic
Extended nav- aid,
generic
Radar station
Radar transponder bea-
con
Radio station
Beacon, generic
LIGHT SECTORS
Light Sectors
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Menu Option
Chart Features
CAUTION & ROUTING
DATA
Caution Areas
Caution area
Fishing facility
Marine farm/cul-
ture
Tracks and Routes
Deep water route part
Deep water route cen-
terline
Fairway
Cable, submarine
Cable area
Offshore prod’n
area
Ferry route
Navigation line
Precautionary area
Radar line
Pipeline
Radar range
Pipeline area
Anchor berth
Anchorage area
Cargo tranship-
ment area
Contiguous zone
Continental shelf
area
Radio calling
Recommended route
centerline
Recommended track
Recommended traffic
lane part
Traffic separation line
Traffic separation
scheme boundary
Traffic separation
Custom zone
Dumping ground
Exclusive economic scheme crossing
zone
Traffic separation
scheme lane part
Traffic separation
scheme roundabout
Traffic separation
zone
Fishery zone
Fishing ground
Free port area
Harbour area
(administrative)
Incineration area
Log pond
Two-way route part
National territorial
area
Sea area
Spoil ground
Straight territorial
sea baseline
Submarine transit
lane
Territorial sea area
Restricted area
Sea Plane landing
area
Military practice
area
MARINE FEATURES
Tideways & Cur-
rents
Tideway
Water turbulence
Tide height
Seabed bottom
Sand waves
Seabed area
Spring
Weed/Kelp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features
C-3
Menu Option
Chart Features
LAND FEATURES
Natural Features
Coastline
Dune
Cultural Features
Airport area
Built-up area
Railway
Road crossing
Road part
Building, religious
Building, single
Cemetery
Fortified Structure
Siloway route part
Tank
Hill
Land elevation
Land region
Land
Runway
Chimney
Salt pan
Slope topline
Tree
Vegetation area
Natural Features -
Rivers
Sloping ground
Square
Cable, overhead
Fence
Pipeline, overhead
Pylon
Telepheric
Dish aerial
Flagstaff/flagpole
Flarestack
Mast
Monument
Radar dome plane land-
ing area
Canal
Canal bank
Rapids
Tunnel entrance
Tower
Windmill
River
Windmotor
River bank
Waterfall
Lake
Lake shore
ICON DISPLAY
Complex (detailed) object/Simple object
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-4
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
The following chart features are always displayed:
Menu option
Chart features
PORTS
Ports:
Services
Port Information
Berthing facility
Causeway
Checkpoint
Crane
Coastguardstation Port area
Pilot boarding
place
Harbour master
Coast Guard
Police
Rescue station
Dam
Signal station, traf- Customs
Distance mark
Dock area
Dry dock
fic
Health emergency
Post office
Yacht club
Signal station,
warning
Dyke area
Dyke crown
Floating dock
Gate
Boat yard
Accessories
Electrical/electronic
repairs
Gridiron
Harbour facility
Hulk
Landing place
Landing stairs
Lock basin
Oil barrier
Pile
Engine repairs
Sailmaker
Fishing/diving gear,
SCUBA
Hotel/Inn
Restaurant
Bank/Exchange office
Pharmacy
Pontoon
Ramp
Port/Marina
Slipway
Shoreline construction
Slipway
Boat hoist
Crane
Weir
Small craft facility
Fuel station
Water
Electricity
Showers
Launderette
Public toilets
Post box
Public telephone
Refuse bin
Visitor’s berth
Chandler
Provisions
Bottle gas
Car Parking
Parking for boat and trail-
ers
Caravan site
Camping site
Sewerage pump-out sta-
tion
CARTOGRAPHIC
OBJECTS
Line, generic
Area, generic
NATURAL FEATURES
Land area
Bridge
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features
C-5
The following chart features are always displayed:
Menu option
ROCKS
Chart features
Underwater Rock
Wrecks
WRECKS
DEPTHS 1
DEPTHS 2
DEPTHS 3
PORTS
Depth area
Dredged area
Intertidal area
Mooring/Warping facility
Fish haven
CAUTION AREAS
OFFSHORE INSTALLA-
TIONS
Diffuser
Obstruction
Production installation
Offshore platform
AREAS, LIMITS
No data area
CARTOGRAPHIC
OBJECTS
Incomplete survey area
NATURAL FEATURES (Ice) Ice area
Pingo
COMPOSITE OBJECTS
Airport
Anchorage
Channel edge
Deep water route
Defined water
Harbour
Range system
Lighthouse
Mooring trot
Navigation mark, afloat
Navigation mark, fixed in point
Traffic Separation Scheme Sys-
tem
CARTOGRAPHIC AREAS
Cartographic II25 area
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-6
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D: SeaTalk and NMEA Data Received and Transmitted
D-1
Appendix D:SeaTalk and NMEA Data
Received and Transmitted
The following table defines the data received on the NMEA/SeaTalk ports.
Data sources are listed in order of priority except where indicated.
Data Received
Source
Position (LAT/LON)
Position (Loran C TD’s)
Speed and Course Over Ground
Waypoint Data
SeaTalk, GGA, RMC, RMA, GLL
GLC, RMA, GTD
SeaTalk, RMC, RMA, VTG
SeaTalk, RMB, APB, BWC, BWR, RMB, XTE
SeaTalk, DBT, DPT
Depth
Apparent Wind Angle and Speed
Boat Speed Through Water
Total Log and Trip Log
Water Temperature
Average Boat Speed through the Water
Heading
SeaTalk, MWV (relative)
SeaTalk, VHW
SeaTalk, VLW
SeaTalk, MTW
SeaTalk only
SeaTalk, HDG, HDM, HDT, VHW
SeaTalk only (Autopilot / Steering Compass)
SeaTalk, RMC, RMA, HDG
SeaTalk only
Locked Heading
Magnetic Variation
Rudder Angle (not displayed)
Time (No priority)
SeaTalk, ZDA, GGA, RMC, GLL, BWC, BWR
SeaTalk, ZDA, RMC
Date
MOB data
SeaTalk only
Autopilot Status (Standby / Auto / Vane / Track) SeaTalk only
Cursor Range and Bearing (from Chartplotter)
Cursor Range and Bearing (from Radar)
SeaTalk only
SeaTalk, RSD
Global Alarms - Watch alarm, Wind alarm,
Autopilot alarms, Depth alarms.
Waypoint arrival
SeaTalk Only
SeaTalk, RMB, APB
SeaTalk, WPL, RTE
Waypoint/Route Transfer
*If Magnetic Headingis notavailable, the True HeadingandVariation(if available) are usedto
generate the magnetic heading.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
The display unit transmits the following data, if available, on SeaTalk:
Data Output
SeaTalk
NMEA Out
1
Position (LAT/LON)
Position (Loran C TD’s)
✔
✔
✔
GGA, GLL, RMC , RMA
RMA
1
,
Speed Over Ground and
Course Over Ground
RMC, VTG ,RMA
1
Waypoint Data
✔
RMB, APB, BWC, BWR
3
Depth
✔
DBT, DPT
Apparent Wind Angle and Speed
Boat Speed Through Water
Total Log and Trip Log
Water Temperature
Heading
✔
—
3
✔
VHW —
3
✔
VLW
3
✔
MTW
3,4
✔
VHW
Magnetic Variation
Time
✔
RMA, RMC
ZDA
✔
Date
✔
ZDA
MOB data
✔
—
2
Cursor Range & Bearing
EBL/VRM Data
✔
RSD
2
—
—
✔
RSD
2
Heading mode
RSD
2
Radar display range
Radar Tracked targets
Waypoint/Route Transfer
RSD
—
—
SeaTalk
TTM
WPL, RTE
Global Alarm
—
Waypoint Arrival Alarm
APB, RMB
1
When available, NMEA OUT data is transmitted from RL70RC and RC520, or fromRL70 if connected to
a Chart display via hsb2.
2
When available, NMEA OUT data is transmitted from RL70 and RL70RC, or from a RC520 if connected
to a Radar display via hsb2.
3
Fishfinder data.
4
Bridged from NMEA if selected in the System Set Up menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E: Connecting a Raymarine Heading Sensor
E-1
Appendix E: Connecting a Raymarine
Heading Sensor
The performance of MARPA on the displays is dependent on the quality of
your heading sensor.
Raymarine recommend that, for optimum MARPA operation, you use the
Pathfinder Smart Heading System (which includes the Gyro Plus 2 unit) or a
G-series course computer, connected via NMEA, as your source of heading
data. The G-series course computer uses rate gyro compensation.
This Appendix provides connection details for a Raymarine 150G or 400G
course computer. For information on the Pathfinder Smart Heading System
refer to the handbook supplied with the compass. Figure 8-14 on page 25
shows a typical Pathfinder system with a Rate Gyro Compass system.
If you have a different heading sensor, or require further assistance, please
contact your authorized Raymarine dealer or Raymarine Technical Support.
G-Series Course Computer
Note: A 150 or 400 course computer coupled to the optional GyroPlus unit
will provide heading data of equal quality to the 150G or 400G course com-
puter. The method of connecting to your display is the same.
If you have a Raymarine 150G or 400G course computer we recommend that
you configure your system as follows and illustrated below:
• Connect the course computer NMEA1 output to the NMEA input .
• For each display, in the System Set Up Menu set Bridge NMEA Heading
OFF (see Bridge NMEA Heading on page 7-9).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Scanner
Typical SeaTalk System
GPS
GAIN
DISPLAY
SEA
MOB
MARKS
MULTI
VRM/EBL
ALARMS
RANGE
Fluxgate
Compass
POWER
ENTER
CLEAR
MENU
SeaTalk
hsb2
To additional
hsb2 displays
NMEA
SeaTalk
NMEA
G Series Course Computer
Distribution Panel
12/24V
Supply
12/24V
Supply
NMEA
SeaTalk
SeaTalk
D5669-2
Figure E-1: hsb2 System with a G-Series Course Computer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F: Abbreviations
F-1
Appendix F: Abbreviations
A
Amp
ANSI
AWG
American National Standards Institute
American Wire Gauge
BDI
Brg
Bearing and Distance Indicator
Bearing
CCFL
CD
Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp
Course Deviation Indicator
Code of Federal Regulations
Course Made Good
Course Over Ground
Cathode Ray Tube
CFR
CMG
COG
CRT
CTR
Center
dB
deciBels
DC
DMG
DR
Direct Current
Distance Made Good
Dead Reckoning
EBL
EMC
ETA
Electronic Bearing Line
Electro Magnetic Compatibility
Estimated Time of Arrival
FCC
FLT
ft
Federal Communication Commission
Float - floating EBL/VRM
feet
FTC
Fast Time Constant
GPS
Global Positioning System
differential Global Positioning System
Guard Zone
dGPS
GRD
GHz
Giga Hertz
HDG
hsb2
Hz
Heading
High Speed Bus
Hertz
MHz
Mega Hertz
IEEE
in, "
Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
inch
Kg
kW
kilogram
kilo Watt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F-2
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
lat
latitude
lbs
pounds
LCD
lon
Liquid Crystal Display
longitude
M
m
Magnetic
meters
MARPA
MBS
mm
Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
Main Bang Suppression
millimeter
MOB
MRK
Man OverBoard
Mark
nm
nautical mile
NMEA
National Marine Electronics Association
POS
Position (of vessel)
RF
Rng
rpm
Radio Frequency
Range
Revolutions Per Minute
SSB
SHM
SOG
STC
Single Side Band
Ships Heading Marker
Speed Over Ground
Sensitivity Time Control
T
True
TFT
TTG
Thin Film Transistor
Time To Go
V
Volts
VHF
VMG
VRM
Very High Frequency
Velocity Made Good
Variable Range Marker
WPT
XTE
yds
Waypoint
Cross Track Error
yards
ZMB
Zoom Box
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
xiii
CDI
A
Window Options 1.6, 1.8, 2.10
Accessories 8.4
Acquire
a Target 3.26
Adding
Center Control (Radar) 2.17
Center the Chart 1.13, 2.19
Changing the Heading Mode 4.1, 4.2
Changing the Radar Range 3.3
Changing the Targets Display 3.11
Chart
a Waypoint to a Route 5.19, 5.28
Adjusting Gain, Sea Clutter and Rain Clutter 3.7
Advanced Set Up 7.2, 7.16
Display Timing 7.16
STC Preset 7.17
Center 1.13, 2.19
Data 4.1, 5.2
Nearest 5.7
Tune Preset 7.17
Object Information 5.4, 7.18, 7.20
Alarm Clock Alarm 6.4
Alarms 3.1, 3.21
Port 5.4, 5.5
Source 5.4
Alarm Clock 6.4
Tide 5.4, 5.6
Anchor 6.4
Arrival 5.31, 6.4
Controlling Guard Zones 3.19, 3.21
Countdown Timer 6.4
External 6.4
Definition 1.3
Mode 1.6, 1.8
Full Screen 2.7
Orientation 7.18, 7.19
Course Up 7.19
Grounding 6.4
Head Up 7.19
North Up 7.19
MOB 4.5, 6.6
Off Track 6.4
Scale 2.19, 2.21, 5.2, 6.6
Simulator 2.1, 2.5, 7.11
Chart Card 1.4, 1.13
Object Information 5.4, 7.18, 7.20
Chart Grid
On and Off 2.13
Chart Master 1.3
Chart Repeater 1.3
Chartplotter
Setting 6.1, 6.5
ALARMS Key 1.18, 3.19, 3.20, 6.4, 6.5
Alignment
Bearing 7.12, 7.14, 8.17
Anchor Alarm 6.4
Antenna Size 7.12, 7.14
Apelco 182 and 182XT GPS B.2
Arrival Alarm 5.31, 6.4
Autohelm GPS, Z260 and Z273 B.3
Autopilot Pop Up 7.7
Autopilot Pop-Up 7.4
B
Backlight Control 2.6
BDI
Window Options 1.6, 1.8, 2.10
Bearing Alignment 7.12, 7.14, 8.17
Bearing Mode 7.4, 7.6
Blind Sectors 3.6
Control Functions 2.19
Display Options 1.14
Features 1.13, A.3
Functions 1.15
Set Up 7.2, 7.18
Custom Options 1.14, 2.15
Radar/Chart Synch 1.13, 2.20, 7.18, 7.20
Window Options 1.8
CLEAR Key 1.18
Clearing
a Track 5.38, 5.40
Bridge NMEA Heading 7.5, 7.9, 8.30
C
Marks 7.12, 7.13
the Current Route 5.18, 5.23
Wakes 3.12
Cable Runs 8.7
Installation Considerations 8.2
Cables
COG (Course Over Ground) 6.1
Data Box 7.4
Vector 7.18, 7.20
Combined Display
HSB2 8.8
Inter-unit 8.7, 8.8
NMEA 8.7
Power 8.7
SeaTalk 8.7
Definition 1.3
Operating Modes 1.6, 1.8
Combined Radar/Chartplotter
Identifying Objects 3.1
Identifying Objects with Cursor Echo 4.6, 6.7
Switching Control 2.9
Cancel
a Target 3.26
MOB 4.6, 6.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xiv
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Connections 8.11
Log/Trip 7.4
Display Unit 8.12
MARPA Target 3.27
MOB 4.5, 6.6, 7.4
Moving 1.17, 2.14
On/Off 2.14, 3.18
Pilot 7.4
HSB2 8.12, 8.21
NMEA Input 8.12, 8.23, 8.27
NMEA Output 8.12, 8.29, 8.31
Power 8.11
Power & NMEA In 8.12, 8.14, 8.27
Scanner 8.12, 8.13
SeaTalk 8.12, 8.23, 8.26
Context-sensitive Cursor 1.17, 2.19
Deleting Items 1.17
Contrast Adjustment 2.6
Control Functions
Position 7.4
Ruler 6.2, 6.3
SOG 7.4
Speed 7.4
Temperature 7.4
Tide Set/Drift 7.4
Time 7.4
Chartplotter 2.19
VMG 7.4
Radar 2.16
VRM/EBL 3.18
Controlling Guard Zone Alarms 3.19, 3.21
Conventions Used 2.1
Countdown Timer Alarm 6.4
Course Up 4.2, 7.19
Creating a Route 5.18
by Placing Waypoints 5.19
from a Track 5.38, 5.42
Using the Waypoint List 5.20
Cross Track Error - See XTE
Current Route 5.18
Altering 5.29
Waypoint 7.4
Wind 7.4
XTE 7.4
Data Conversion 8.30
Data Display 5.25
Chart Object 5.4, 7.18, 7.20
Nearest 5.7
Port 5.4, 5.5
Source 5.4
Tide 5.4, 5.6
Route 5.19, 5.24
Clearing 5.18, 5.23
Cursor 1.16
Data from other Equipment 4.1, 6.1, 6.6, 8.30
Chart 4.1
Context-sensitive 1.17, 2.19
Data Box 2.13
COG 6.1
Heading 1.9, 3.23, 4.1, 4.5, 6.1, 6.6, 7.9, E.1
Goto 5.29, 5.33
HSB2 4.1, 6.1
Moving 1.17
Navigation Data 4.1
NMEA 4.1, 4.4, 6.1, 8.27
Position 1.9, 4.1, 4.5, 6.1, 6.6
Radar 6.1
Readout 7.4, 7.6
Reference 7.4, 7.6
Cursor Echo 3.1, 4.1, 6.1, 6.7, 7.5, 7.9
Chart 4.6, 6.7, 7.9
Local 4.6, 6.7, 7.9
Radar 4.6, 6.7, 7.9
SeaTalk 4.6, 6.7, 7.9
Custom Options
SeaTalk 4.1, 4.4, 4.6, 6.1, 6.7, 8.25
Speed 4.5, 6.6
Waypoint 4.1
Data Log Mode 1.6, 1.8, 6.1, 6.10
Full Screen 2.7
Chartplotter 1.14, 2.15
Database List 1.16, 1.20
MARPA 3.26, 3.27
Route 5.15, 5.19, 5.22, 5.25
Retrieving 5.23
Customizing
the Chart Display 7.18
the Screen Presentation Options 2.13
D
Track 5.40
Waypoint 5.8, 5.9, 5.13, 5.14, 5.20, 5.32
Date Data Box 7.4
Date Format 7.5, 7.10
Datum Selection 7.18, 7.20
Day/Night 7.4, 7.7
Dedicated Keys 1.4, 1.16, 1.18
ALARMS 1.18, 3.19, 3.20, 6.4, 6.5
CLEAR 1.18
Data Box 2.14, 7.4, 7.6
COG 7.4
Cursor 2.13
Date 7.4
Depth 7.4
Group of Six 2.14
On/Off 2.14
Heading 7.4
DISPLAY 1.8, 1.18, 2.7, 2.8, 2.16, 6.10
ENTER 1.18
List of 7.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
xv
GAIN 1.18, 3.4, 3.7
False 3.5
Indirect 3.6
Multiple 3.6
MARKS 1.18, 4.4, 4.5, 5.9, 5.12, 5.35, 5.36,
6.6
MENU 1.18, 2.5, 5.38, 6.8, 7.1, 7.2
MULTI 1.18, 3.4, 3.7, 3.22
POWER 1.18, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4
RANGE 1.18, 2.21, 2.22, 3.3, 5.2
VRM/EBL 1.18, 3.13, 3.14, 6.1, 6.3
Editing
a Route 5.19, 5.27
Using the ST60/80 Navigator Keypad 5.17
Waypoint Details 5.8, 5.13
Electromagnetic Energy 1.iii
EMC
Deleting
a Guard Zone 3.19, 3.21
Conformance 1.v, 8.20
Servicing and Safety Guidelines 9.1
ENTER Key 1.18
Erasing
a Route 5.19, 5.26
a Waypoint 5.8, 5.14
Expansion (Radar Targets) 3.4, 3.11, 3.12
External Alarms 6.4
F
a Mark 4.5
a VRM/EBL 3.16
with the Context Sensitive Cursor 1.17
Deleting - See also Erasing
Depth Data Box 7.4
Determining Radar Range 3.3
D-GPS Set Up
Beacon Frequency 6.9
Beacon ID 6.9
Bit Rate 6.9
Factory Reset 9.2
False Echoes 3.4, 3.5
Features
Differential Age 6.9
Signal Strength & Signal to Noise Ratio 6.9
Display
Chartplotter 1.13, A.3
Display 1.5
Features 1.5
Lighting 2.6
Operating Modes 1.6
Selecting 2.7
Radar 1.10, A.2
Find Ship 2.19, 2.20
Fishfinder
Definition 1.3
Set Up Options 1.6
DISPLAY Key 1.8, 1.18, 2.7, 2.8, 2.16, 6.10
Display Options
Chartplotter 1.14
Radar 1.10
Display Timing Set Up 7.16
Display Unit 1.iii, 1.4
Connections 8.12
Mode 1.8
Window Options 1.8
Fishfinder Master 1.3
Fishfinder Repeater 1.3
Floating VRM/EBLs 3.14, 3.16
Follow
a Route 5.29
Route Options 5.29, 5.31
Console Mounting 8.9
Contrast Adjustment 2.6
Grounding 8.11
Stop 5.29, 5.33
FTC Control 3.4, 3.7, 3.10
Functions
Lighting Adjustment 2.6
Location 8.5
Chartplotter 1.15
Radar 1.12
Mounting 8.9
Specification A.1
Switching Off 2.4
G
Gain
Adjusting 3.7
Control 3.4
Recommendations 3.8
GAIN Key 1.18, 3.4, 3.7
Goto
Switching On 8.15
Displaying
a Waypoint 2.14
Bearing Data (EBLs) 7.12
Chart Data 5.3
a Target 5.29, 5.32
a Waypoint 5.29, 5.32
Cursor 5.29, 5.33
Stop 5.29, 5.33
Waypoint Data 5.8, 5.12, 5.25
Displaying the Radar and Synchronising Radar &
Chart 2.30
E
GPS
EBL (Electronic Bearing Lines) 3.1, 3.13
Positional Accuracy 6.8
Restart GPS 6.9
Display 7.12
Echoes 3.4
Set Up 6.1, 6.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xvi
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
GPS SOG/COG Filter 7.5, 7.10
G-Series Course Computer E.1
Guard Zones 3.1, 3.19
Controlling Alarms 3.19, 3.21
Deleting 3.19, 3.21
Moving 3.19, 3.21
Placing 3.19, 3.20
Inter-Unit Cable 8.8
Items On-Screen 1.17
J
Junction Box
for External Instruments 8.28
K
Key Beep 7.4, 7.7
Keys
Reshaping 3.19, 3.21
H
Dedicated 1.4, 1.16, 1.18
Half Screen Windows 1.6, 2.7
Lighting 2.6
Selecting 2.8
Soft 1.4, 1.16, 1.19, 7.4, 7.7
L
Head Up 4.2, 7.19
Heading 7.5, 7.9, 8.30
Heading Data 1.9, 3.23, 4.1, 4.5, 6.1, 6.6, 7.9, E.1
Heading Data Box 7.4
Heading Mode 4.2, 7.19
Changing 4.1
Language 7.5, 7.10
LCD Display 1.1
Lighting Control 2.6
Backlight 2.6
Local Cursor Echo 4.6, 6.7, 7.9
Location
Course Up 4.2
Effect on VRM/EBLs 4.3
Head Up 4.2
North Up 4.2
Display Unit 8.2, 8.5
Log/Trip Data Box 7.4
Loran TDs 5.11
Selecting 4.3
M
Heading Vector 7.18, 7.20
Magnetron 2.2
Help 7.4, 7.7
Maintenance 9.1
Help from Raytheon
Europe 9.5
Make and Follow a Route Scenario 2.26
Managing Tracks 5.38
Marks 4.1, 4.4, 5.8
Clearing 7.12, 7.13
Deleting 4.5
US 9.4
High Voltage 1.iii
HSB2
Cable 8.8
Connection 1.4, 8.12, 8.21
Data 4.1, 6.1
Moving 4.5
Options 7.12, 7.13
Placing 4.4
I
Symbol 7.12, 7.13
MARKS Key 1.18, 4.4, 4.5, 5.9, 5.12, 5.35, 5.36,
6.6
Identifying False Echoes 3.5
Identifying Objects 3.1
with Cursor Echo 4.6, 6.7
Indirect Echoes 3.6
Installation
MARPA 1.12, 3.1, 3.23
Database List 3.26, 3.27
Heading Data 1.9
Set Up 7.2, 7.15
Cable Runs 8.2, 8.7
EMC Conformance 8.20
EMC Guidelines 8.2
Integrated System 8.20
Location 8.2, 8.5
Target Data Box 3.27
Master Display 1.4, 5.2, 8.21
Definition 1.3
Measuring Distances Using the VRM/EBL Key
6.1, 6.2
Multiple Display Systems 8.20
Integrated System 1.9, 5.18
Definition 1.3
Measuring Range and Bearing 3.1, 3.14
Floats 3.14, 3.16
Diagram 8.24, 8.25
Identifying Objects 3.1
Installation 8.20
Installation Checks 8.31
Switching Control Between Radar and Chart
2.9
MENU Key 1.18, 2.5, 5.38, 6.8, 7.1, 7.2
Menu Timeout 7.4, 7.7
MOB 4.1, 6.1
Alarm 4.5, 6.6
Cancel 4.6, 6.7
Data Box 4.5, 6.6, 7.4
Data Selection 7.7
Symbol 4.5, 6.6
Interference Rejection 3.4, 3.11, 3.12
Interpreting and Adjusting the Radar Picture 3.1,
3.4
Waypoint 4.5, 6.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
xvii
Modes 1.8
Operating Modes 1.6
Chart 2.7
Chart 1.6, 1.8, 2.7
Data Log 1.6, 1.8, 2.7, 6.1, 6.10
Combined Display 1.6
Data Log 2.7, 6.1, 6.10
Operating Modes
Fishfinder 1.8
Full Screen 2.7
Radar 1.6, 1.8, 2.7
Mounting the Display Unit 8.9
Console Mounting 8.9
Moving
Multiple Display System 1.8
Plotter 2.22, 7.18, 7.19
Radar 2.7
Selecting 2.7
a Data Box 1.17, 2.14
a Floating EBL 3.17
a Guard Zone 3.19, 3.21
a Mark 4.5
Single Display 1.6
Switching Control 2.9
Orientation - Chart 7.18, 7.19
P
a VRM/EBL 3.16
Picture Reset 9.2
a Waypoint 5.9, 5.14, 5.19, 5.27
the Cursor 1.17
Pilot Data Box 7.4
Pilot Pop Up 7.7
MULTI Key 1.18, 3.4, 3.7, 3.22
Multiple Display System
Connections 8.22
Pilot Pop-Up 7.4
Place and Goto a Waypoint Scenario 2.24
Placing
Installation 8.20
a Guard Zone 3.19, 3.20
Operating Modes 1.8
Multiple Echoes 3.4, 3.6
N
a Mark 4.4
a VRM/EBL 3.14
a Waypoint 5.8, 5.9, 5.19
Plotter Mode 2.22, 7.18, 7.19
Pop-up Menus 1.16, 1.19
Port Data 5.4, 5.5
Position
a Waypoint 5.8, 5.13
Position Data 1.9, 4.1, 4.5, 6.1, 6.6
Position Data Box 7.4
Position Offset 7.18, 7.21
Positional Accuracy 6.8
Power
Naming
a Route 5.19, 5.22, 5.26
a Track 5.40
a Waypoint 5.8, 5.13, 5.17
Using the ST60/80 Navigator Keypad 5.17
Nav Data
from other Equipment 4.1
Window Options 1.8, 2.10
Navigation Aid 1.iii
Navigational Echoes 3.4
Navigator Keypad 5.9, 5.15
NMEA 1.9
Cable 8.7
Connection 8.11
Cable 8.7
for External Equipment 8.11, 8.20
Power & NMEA Input
Connection 8.12, 8.14, 8.27
POWER Key 1.18, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4
Power-on Reset 9.2
Power-on Sequence 2.2, 2.4
Chart Mode 2.4
Radar Mode 2.2
Predicted Position 7.15
R
Radar
Data 4.1, 4.4, 6.1, 8.27
Heading 7.5, 7.9, 8.30
Input Connection 8.12, 8.23, 8.27
Output Connection 8.12, 8.29, 8.31
NMEA Out Set Up 7.5, 7.9
North Up 4.2, 7.19
O
Object Information - Chart 7.18, 7.20
Displaying 5.4
Off Track Alarm 6.4
Offsetting the Center 1.10, 1.13
Range Rings 2.18
Control Functions 2.16
Features 1.10, A.2
Functions 1.12
Operating Controls
Cursor 1.16
Mode
Database List 1.16, 1.20
Dedicated Keys 1.4, 1.16, 1.18
Pop-up Menus 1.16, 1.19
Soft Keys 1.4, 1.16, 1.19, 7.4, 7.7
Trackpad 1.4, 1.16, 2.19
Full Screen 2.7
Range
Changing 3.3
Custom Scale 7.12, 7.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xviii
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Set Up 7.2
Radar/Chart Synch 1.13
Simulator 2.1, 2.5
System Alignment 8.15
System Test 8.15
RL70CRC Pathfinder Radar 1.1
RL70RC PLUS Pathfinder Radar/Chartplotter 1.1
Route
Clearing 5.18
Creating 5.18
Timing Adjustment 8.19
Typical System Diagram 8.1
Window Options 1.8, 2.10
Creating from a Track 5.38, 5.42
Current 5.18
Data Display 5.19, 5.24
Database List 5.15, 5.19, 5.22, 5.23, 5.25
Editing 5.19, 5.27
Radar Display
Center Control 2.17
Definition 1.3
Options 1.10
Using the ST60/80 Navigator Keypad
5.17
Range Rings 2.18
Radar Master 1.3
Erasing 5.19, 5.26
Follow 5.29
Radar Mode 1.6, 1.8
Loading from a User Cartridge 5.34
Naming 5.19, 5.22, 5.26
NMEA Transfer 5.34
Retrieving 5.18, 5.23
Reversing 5.27, 5.28
Saving 5.18
Radar Repeater 1.3
Radar Set Up 7.12
Radar System 1.5
Radar/Chart Overlay 1.13
Radar/Chart Synchronization 1.13, 2.20, 7.18,
7.20
Saving to a User Cartridge 5.34
Transferring 5.18, 5.34
Route Leg 5.18
Rain Control 3.4, 3.10
Adjusting 3.7
Distant Rain 3.10
Data Display 5.24
Range
Routine Checks 9.1
Ruler Data Box 6.2, 6.3
S
Changing 3.3
Control 3.1
Determining 3.3
Safe Zone 7.15
Scale
Safety 1.iii, 5.1
Custom 3.2, 7.12, 7.13
RANGE Key 1.18, 2.21, 2.22, 3.3, 5.2
Range Rings 2.18, 3.2
On and Off 2.13
Electromagnetic Energy 1.iii
EMC Guidelines 8.2, 9.1
Navigation Aid 1.iii
Saving
Raystar 112 and 105 GPS B.2
Raystar 112LP GPS B.4
Raystar 114 GPS B.5
Raystar 120 WAAS GPS Receiver B.6
RC520 PLUS Chartplotter 1.1
Remote Cursor Echo
Chart 4.6, 6.7, 7.9
a Route 5.18
a Track 5.40
Scale
Chart 2.19, 2.21, 5.2, 6.6
Radar Range 3.2
Custom 7.12, 7.13
Scanner 1.iii, 1.4
Radar 4.6, 6.7, 7.9
Connection 8.12, 8.13
Removing
Modes
a Waypoint from a Route 5.19, 5.28
Repeater Display 1.4, 5.2, 5.18, 8.21
Definition 1.3
Scanner Off 2.2, 2.3
Standby 1.4, 2.2, 2.3
Timed Transmit 1.4, 7.12, 7.13
Transmit 1.4, 2.2
Reshaping
a Guard Zone 3.19, 3.21
Switching Off 2.4
Restart
Transmission Check 8.17
Scanner Off Mode 2.2, 2.3
Scenarios
GPS 6.9
XTE 5.29, 5.32
Retrieving a Route 5.18, 5.23
Returning to the Full-Screen Display 2.9
Reverse a Route 5.27, 5.28
Review Your Passage Plan Scenario 2.28, 2.29
RL70 PLUS Pathfinder Radar 1.1
Displaying the Radar and Synchronising Radar
& Chart 2.30
Make & Follow a Route 2.26
Place & Goto a Waypoint 2.24
Review Your Passage Plan 2.28, 2.29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
xix
Sea Clutter
Follow 5.29, 5.33
Goto 5.29, 5.33
Track - See Clear Track
Adjusting 3.7
Control 3.4
Recommendations 3.9
Switching
SeaTalk 1.9
Chart Grid On and Off 2.13
Chartplotter On 2.4
Cable 8.7
Connection 8.12, 8.23, 8.26
Cursor Data Box On and Off 2.13
Data Boxes On/Off 2.14
Databoxes On/Off 3.18
Display On and Off 2.4, 8.15
Range Rings On and Off 2.13
Scanner Off 2.4
Cursor Echo 4.6, 7.9
Data 4.1, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.1, 6.7, 8.25
Selecting
a Half Screen Window 2.8
a Waypoint 5.8, 5.12
the Heading Mode 4.3
the Operating Mode 2.7
Send on HSB 7.12, 7.14
Servicing
EMC Guidelines 9.1
Set Up Options 1.6, 2.15
Set Up Parameters
Symbol
Marks 7.12, 7.13
MOB 4.5, 6.6
Waypoint 5.8, 5.13, 7.18, 7.20
Synchronize Chart and Radar 1.13, 2.20, 7.18
System
Connections 8.11
Grounding 8.11
GPS Set Up 6.9
Seting Up
Set Up 7.2, 7.4
a GPS 6.9
Setting Alarms and Timers 6.1, 6.5
Setting Up
T
Target (Chart) 5.29
Arrival 5.29, 5.31
Goto 5.29, 5.32
Waypoint 5.29, 5.32
Targets (MARPA) 1.12, 3.1
Acquire 3.26
a GPS 6.1, 6.8, 6.9
Advanced Radar Options 7.2, 7.16
Chart Parameters 7.2, 7.18
GPS Set Up
Restart GPS 6.9
Cancel 3.26
Initial Set Up 8.15
Data 3.27
MARPA 7.2, 7.15
History 7.15
Vector 7.15
Radar Parameters 7.2, 7.12
System Parameters 7.2, 7.4
Tracks 5.38, 5.39
Targets (Radar) 1.4, 2.3
Control 3.4
Shadows 3.6
Expansion 3.4, 3.11, 3.12
Interference Rejection 3.4, 3.11, 3.12
Wakes 3.4, 3.11, 3.12
Tracking 3.1
SHM (Ship's Heading Marker) 1.10, 3.19
Head Up Mode 2.18
Side Lobes 3.5
Simulator 7.5, 7.11
Temperature Data Box 7.4
Terminology 1.3
Chart 2.1, 2.5
Radar 2.1, 2.5
Tide Data 5.4, 5.6
Tide Set/Drift Data Box 7.4
Tide Vector 7.18, 7.20
Time Data Box 7.4
Time Format 7.5, 7.10
Time Offset 7.5, 7.10
Timed Transmit Mode 1.4, 7.12, 7.13
Timers
SmartRoute 5.42
Soft Key Labels 7.7
Soft Keys 1.4, 1.16, 1.19, 7.4, 7.7
SOG (Speed Over Ground) Data Box 7.4
Specification
Display A.1
Speed Data 4.5, 6.6
Speed Data Box 7.4
ST60/80 Navigator Keypad 5.9, 5.15, 5.17
Standby Mode 1.4, 2.2, 2.3
Status Bar 1.10, 1.13
STC Preset 7.17
Alarm Clock 6.4
Countdown 6.4
Setting 6.1
Trackpad 1.4, 1.16, 2.19
Tracks
Stop
Clearing 5.38, 5.40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xx
hsb2 PLUS Series LCD Display
Converting to Route 5.42
Database List 5.40
Managing 5.38, 5.40
Naming 5.40
Target 5.29, 5.32
Transferring 5.8, 5.18, 5.34
Transferring on NMEA 5.34
Transferring on SeaTalk 5.34
Using the ST60/80 Navigator Keypad
5.17
Saving 5.40
Waypoint List
Creating a Route 5.20
Wind Data Box 7.4
Window Options
BDI 1.6, 1.8, 2.10
CDI 1.6, 1.8, 2.10
Chartplotter 1.8, 2.10
Fishfinder 1.8
Setting Up 5.38, 5.39
Transferring
a Route 5.18, 5.34
a Waypoint 5.8, 5.18, 5.34
Transmission Check 8.17
Transmit Mode 1.4, 2.2, 2.3
Tune Preset 7.17
Full Screen 1.6
Half Screen 1.6, 2.7
Nav Data 1.8, 2.10
Radar 1.8, 2.10
World Map 1.13, 5.2
X
Tuning the Receiver 3.4, 3.9
U
Units 7.4, 7.8
User Cartridge 5.34
XTE (Cross Track Error)
Data Box 7.4
V
Variation Source 7.5, 7.8
Restart 5.29, 5.32
Vectors 7.18, 7.20
Z
MARPA Target 7.15
VMG Data Box 7.4
Zoom 1.10, 1.13, 2.16
VRM (Variable Range Markers) 3.1, 3.13
VRM/EBL 3.14, 3.16
Data Box 3.18
Effect of Heading Mode 4.3
VRM/EBL Key 1.18, 3.13, 3.14, 6.1, 6.3
W
WAAS B.6
Wakes 3.4, 3.11
Clearing 3.12
Warranty 1.v
Waypoint 2.14, 4.1, 7.18, 7.20
Adding to a Route 5.19, 5.28
Data Box 7.4
Data Display 5.8, 5.12, 5.25
Database List 5.8, 5.9, 5.13, 5.14, 5.20, 5.32
Displaying 2.14
Editing 5.8
Editing Details 5.13
Erasing 5.8, 5.14
Goto 5.29, 5.32
Loading from a User Cartridge 5.34
MOB 4.5, 6.6
Moving 5.9, 5.14, 5.19, 5.27
Naming 5.8, 5.13
Numbers 7.15, 7.18, 7.20
Placing 5.8, 5.9, 5.19
Position 5.8, 5.13
Removing from a Route 5.19, 5.28
Saving to a User Cartridge 5.34
Selecting 5.8, 5.12
Symbol 5.8, 5.13, 7.18, 7.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warranty Certificate
The Raymarine warranty terms and conditions as described below do not affect the customer’s statutory rights.
Limited Warranty
Raymarine warrants each new Light Marine Product to be of good materials and workmanship. Raymarine, or
it’s approved agents, will repair or exchange under warranty any parts proven to be defective in material or
workmanship under normal use, for a period of 2 years/24 months from date of sale to end user, or 30 months
from date of shipment from Raymarine – whichever expires first, except as provided below.
Raymarine Limited Warranty covers the parts and labor associated with any warranty repair as described
above, provided that the unit is returned to Raymarine or one of it’s appointed agents.
Installed Warranty
In addition to the Limited Warranty cover as described above, Raymarine will, except as provided below,
cover travel costs (auto mileage and tolls) up to 100 round trip highway miles (160 kilometers) and travel time
of 2 hours, to enable onboard warranty service to be carried out on products where proof of installation or com-
mission by Raymarine certified installers, can be shown.
The Installed Warranty provides for onboard repair or exchange, by Raymarine or it’s approved service
agents, for a period of 2 years/24 months, from date of sale of the boat to the end user – where the equipment
has been installed by a Raymarine certified installer, or from commissioning of the installation by a Raymarine
certified installer, or 30 months from date of shipment of the equipment from Raymarine – whichever expires
first, except as provided below.
Obtaining Warranty Service
In the event of Warranty service being required, contact Raymarine or the nearest Raymarine certified service
agent – a full list of local service agents are available on the Internet or can be requested from the nearest Ray-
marine agent.
A suitable proof of purchase, showing date, place of purchase, and serial number must be made available to
Raymarine or authorized service agent at the time of request for Warranty service.
In cases where a Raymarine certified installer has not installed the product; i.e. Limited Warranty, the
affected unit must be returned to the local Raymarine approved service agent, with a copy of proof of purchase
and/or completed warranty card. Subject to the Limitations below, the unit will be repaired/replaced at no fur-
ther cost to the user and promptly returned to the user.
In cases where the equipment has been installed by a Raymarine certified installer (boat builder, installer
dealer etc.), i.e. Installed Warranty, the nearest local service agent should be contacted and onboard service
requested, the warranty card, correctly completed and stamped by the installing agent, must be available as
authorization for onboard service.
Warranty Limitations
Raymarine Warranty policy does not apply to equipment that has been subjected to accident, abuse or misuse,
shipping damage, alterations, corrosion, incorrect and/or non-authorized service, or equipment on which the
serial number has been altered, mutilated or removed.
Raymarine assumes no responsibility for damage incurred during installation or as a result of improper instal-
lation.
This Warranty does not cover routine system checkouts, alignment/calibration, sea-trials or commissioning,
unless required by replacement of part(s) in the area being aligned.
A suitable proof of purchase, showing date, place, and serial number must be made available to Raymarine or
authorized service agent at the time of request for Warranty service.
Consumable items, (such as: fuses, batteries, drive belts, radar mixer diodes, snap-in impeller carriers, impel-
lers, impeller bearings, and impeller shaft) are specifically excluded from this Warranty.
All costs associated with transducer replacement, other than the cost of the transducer itself, are specifically
excluded from this Warranty.
Overtime/premium labor portion of services outside of normal working hours is not covered by this Warranty.
Continued . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Travel cost allowance on certain products with a suggested retail price below $2500.00 is not authorized.
When/or if repairs are necessary, these products must be forwarded to a Raymarine facility or an authorized
dealer at owner’s expense and then will be returned via surface carrier at no cost to the owner.
Travel costs other than auto mileage, tolls and two (2) hours travel time, are specifically excluded on all prod-
ucts. Travel costs, which are excluded from the coverage of this Warranty, include but are not limited to: taxi,
launch fees, aircraft rental, subsistence, customs, shipping and communication charges etc. Travel costs, mile-
age and time, in excess to that allowed must have prior approval in writing.
TO THE EXTENT CONSISTENT WITH STATE AND FEDERAL LAW:
(1) THIS WARRANTY IS STRICTLY LIMITED TO THE TERMS INDICATED HEREIN, AND NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES SHALL BE BINDING ON RAYMARINE INCLUDING WITH-
OUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABLE OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
(2) Raymarine shall not be liable for any incidental, consequential or special (including punitive or multiple)
damages.
All Raymarine products sold or provided hereunder are merely aids to navigation. It is
the responsibility of the user to exercise discretion and proper navigational skill inde-
pendent of any Raymarine equipment.
Document number: 84066-9
July 2002
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Factory Service Centers
United States of America
UK, Europe, Middle East, Far East
Raymarine Inc
22 Cotton Road,Unit D
Nashua, NH 03063-4219, USA
Raymarine Ltd
Anchorage Park, Portsmouth
PO3 5TD, England
Telephone: +1 603 881 5200
Fax: +1 603 864 4756
www.raymarine.com
Telephone: +44 (0)23 9269 3611
Fax: +44 (0)23 9269 4642
www.raymarine.com
Sales & Order Services
Telephone: +1 800 539 5539 Ext. 2333 or
+1 603 881 5200 Ext. 2333
Customer Support
Telephone: +44 (0)23 9271 4713
Fax: +44 (0)23 9266 1228
www.raymarine.com
Technical Support
Telephone: +1 800 539 5539 Ext. 2444 or
+1 603 881 5200 Ext. 2444
www.raymarine.com
Product Repair Center
Telephone: +1 800 539 5539 Ext. 2118
Stick barcode label here
Purchased from
Dealer address
Purchase date
Installed by
Installation date
Commissioned by
Commissioning date
Owner’s name
Mailing address
This portion should be completed and retained by the owner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|